Denon AVC-X8500HA Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 349
1 of 349

Summary of Content for Denon AVC-X8500HA Owner's Manual PDF

.

AVC-X8500HA INTEGRATED NETWORK AV AMPLIFIER

Owners Manual

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

1Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Accessories 8 Inserting the batteries 9 Operating range of the remote control unit 9

Features 10 High quality sound 10 High performance 13 Easy operation 17

Part names and functions 18 Front panel 18 Display 22 Rear panel 24 Remote control unit 28

Connections Speaker installation 33 Connecting speakers 42

Before connecting speakers 42 Speaker configuration and Amp Assign settings 46 Connecting 5.1-channel speakers 48 Connecting 7.1-channel speakers 49 Connecting 9.1-channel speakers 54 Connecting 13.1-channel speakers 63 Connecting 15.1-channel speakers 68 Bi-amp connection 74 Connecting 11.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speakers 76 Connecting multi-zone speakers 77 Connecting an external power amplifier 81

Connecting a TV 82 Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) 83 Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) 84 Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector 85

Connecting a playback device 86 Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) 87 Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player 88 Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible with the Denon Link HD function 89 Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K 90 Connecting a video camcorder or game console 91 Connecting a turntable 92 Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector 93

Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port 94 Connecting to a home network (LAN) 95

Wired LAN 95 Wireless LAN 96

Connecting an external control device 97 REMOTE CONTROL jacks 97 TRIGGER OUT jacks 98

Connecting the power cord 99

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

2Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playback Basic operation 101

Turning the power on 101 Selecting the input source 101 Adjusting the volume 102 Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 102 Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 102

Playing a USB memory device 103 Playing files stored on USB memory devices 104

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device 107 Playing music from Bluetooth device 108 Pairing with other Bluetooth devices 110 Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device 111

Listening to Internet Radio 112 Listening to Internet Radio 113

Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS 114 Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS 115

Getting the HEOS App 118 HEOS Account 119 Playing from streaming music services 120 Listening to the same music in multiple rooms 123

AirPlay function 127 Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad 128 Playing iTunes music with this unit 128 Play a song from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad on multiple synced devices (AirPlay 2) 129

Spotify Connect function 130 Playing Spotify music with this unit 130

Convenience functions 131 Adding to HEOS Favorites 132 Playing back HEOS Favorites 132 Deleting a HEOS Favorites 133 Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer) 133 Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust) 134 Adjusting the tone (Tone) 135 Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select) 136 Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode) 137 Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo) 138

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

3Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting a sound mode 139 Selecting a sound mode 140 Direct playback 141 Pure Direct playback 142 Auto surround playback 142 Description of sound mode types 143 Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal 149

HDMI Control function 155 Setting procedure 155

Smart Menu function 156 Sleep timer function 158

Using the sleep timer 159 Quick select plus function 160

Calling up the settings 161 Changing the settings 162

Panel lock function 163 Disabling all key button operations 163 Disabling all button operations except VOLUME 163 Canceling the Panel lock function 164

Remote lock function 165 Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit 165 Enabling the remote sensor function 165

Web control function 166 Controlling the unit from a web control 166

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room) 168 Connecting ZONE 168 Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 173

Settings Menu map 175

Menu operations 179

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

4Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audio 180 Subwoofer Level Adjust 180 Bass Sync 180 Surround Parameter 181 Restorer 189 Audio Delay 190 Volume 191 Audyssey 192 Graphic EQ 195

Video 197 Picture Adjust 197 HDMI Setup 199 Output Settings 204 Analog Video Out 208 On Screen Display 208 4K/8K Signal Format 209 TV Format 211

Inputs 212 Input Assign 212 Source Rename 214 Hide Sources 215 Source Level 215 Input Select 216

Speakers 217 Audyssey Setup 217

Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey Setup) 219 Error messages 225 Retrieving Audyssey Setup settings 227

Manual Setup 228 Amp Assign 228 Speaker Config. 238 Distances 244 Levels 245 Crossovers 246 Bass 247 Front Speaker 248 2ch Playback 248

Network 251 Information 251 Connection 251 Wi-Fi Setup 252 Settings 254 Network Control 256 Friendly Name 256 Diagnostics 257

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

5Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

HEOS Account 258 You have not signed in 258 You have already signed in 258

General 259 Language 259 ECO 259 ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup 263 Zone Rename 265 Quick Select Names 265 Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 266 Front Display 266 Firmware 267 Information 270 Remote ID 272 Usage Data 272 Save & Load 273 Setup Lock 273

Operating external devices with the remote control unit 274 Registering preset codes 275 Operating devices 278 Operating learning function 281 Operating macro function 284 Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit 288 Setting the Remote ID 289 Setting the display time length of the remote control unit display 289 Setting the back light 290 Restoring all settings of the remote control unit to default 290

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

6Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Tips Tips 292 Troubleshooting 294

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off 295 Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 296 Display on this unit shows nothing 296 No sound comes out 297 Desired sound does not come out 298 Sound is interrupted or noise occurs 301 No video is shown on the TV 302 The menu screen is not displayed on the TV 304 The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal 304 AirPlay cannot be played back 305 USB memory devices cannot be played back 306 Bluetooth cannot be played back 307 The Internet radio cannot be played back 308 Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back 309 Various online services cannot be played 310 The HDMI Control function does not work 310 Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network 311 When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 312 Update/upgrade error messages 313

Resetting factory settings 314 Resetting network settings 315 Restoring the firmware to the factory defaults 316

Appendix About HDMI 317 Video conversion function 321 Playing back a USB memory devices 323 Playing back a Bluetooth device 324 Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS 325 Playing back Internet Radio 326 Personal memory plus function 326 Last function memory 326 Explanation of terms 327 Trademark information 337 Specifications 340 Index 346

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

7Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Thank you for purchasing this Denon product. To ensure proper operation, please read this owners manual carefully before using the product. After reading this manual, be sure to keep it for future reference.

Accessories Check that the following parts are supplied with the product.

.

Quick Start Guide Safety Instructions Notes on radio Cable labels

Power cord

External antennas for Bluetooth/wireless

connectivity

Sound calibration microphone

Sound calibration microphone stand

Cautions on Using Batteries

Remote control unit (RC-1221)

LR6/AA batteries

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

8Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Inserting the batteries 1 Slide the rear cover off the remote control unit in the

arrow direction.

.

2 Insert two batteries correctly into the battery compartment as indicated.

.

Batteries

3 Put the rear cover back on.

NOTE 0 To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid: 0 Do not use a new battery together with an old one. 0 Do not use two different types of batteries.

0 Remove the batteries from the remote control unit if it will not be in use for long periods.

0 If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.

Operating range of the remote control unit

Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor when operating it.

.

Approx. 7 m 30 30

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

9Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Features High quality sound 0 The Ultimate 13.2-channel Home Theater Experience

Featuring Denons most advanced and sophisticated power amplifier design, this unit delivers high-power performance at 150 watts per channel (8 /ohms, 20 Hz - 20 kHz, T.H.D.: 0.05 %, 2ch. driven) to ensure a dynamic and precise entertainment experience. Low impedance drivers provide operational stability for a wide range of speakers and create a balanced, tonal sound.

0 Dolby Atmos (v p. 328) This unit is equipped with a decoder that supports Dolby Atmos audio format. The placement or movement of sound is accurately reproduced by the addition of overhead speakers, enabling you to experience an incredibly natural and realistic surround sound field.

0 Speaker Virtualizer (v p. 183) Speaker Virtualizer enables you to access a more immersive entertainment experience from traditional channel based speaker layouts through digital signal processing including Dolby Atmos height virtualization and surround virtualization. 0 Speaker Virtualizer is not for use when both height speakers and surround

speakers are connected. 0 Height Virtualization may be applied when surround speakers are connected.

0 DTS:X Pro This unit is equipped with the DTS:X Pro decoder technology. DTS:X Pro decoder brings the home theater experience to new heights with its immersive object based audio technology which removes the bounds of channels. Enjoy up to 13.1-channels of audio processing with DTS:X Pro to enjoy a full surround sound in exquisite detail.

0 DTS Virtual:X (v p. 332) DTS Virtual:X technology features DTSs proprietary virtual height and virtual surround processing to deliver an immersive sound experience from any type of input source (stereo to 7.1.4 channel) and speaker configuration. 0 DTS Virtual:X is not for use when Height speakers are connected.

0 IMAX Enhanced (v p. 332) This IMAX Enhanced product have met stringent performance standards established by IMAX and DTS in order to create a consistent and higher bar for sound performance. DTS has developed a special method for reproducing an IMAX signature sound experience in the consumers home. This method combines a unique conversion process for IMAX theatrical audio mixes utilizing an enhanced DTS codec technology. The IMAX theatrical audio format with point source surround speakers closely matches the speaker configuration most consumers have in their homes today. Coupled with DTS audio technology, IMAX Enhanced audio products will ensure the best and most accurate audio reproduction over 5.1 or more speaker channels.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

10Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 MPEG-H This unit is equipped with the MPEG-H decoder technology. The MPEG-H Audio system enables immersive, interactive and customizable sound with advanced accessibility features such as dialogue enhancement and audio description.

0 Audyssey LFC (Low Frequency Containment) (v p. 194) Audyssey LFC solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFC dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors.

0 Discrete subwoofers and Audyssey Sub EQ HT (v p. 218) The unit has two subwoofer output capability and can adjust the level and delay for each subwoofer individually. Audyssey Sub EQ HT makes the integration seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ XT32 to both subwoofers together for improved deep bass response and detail.

0 Denons unique high quality playback technology Denon Link HD (v p. 336) This unit is equipped with our exclusive Denon Link HD technology. When connected to a Denon disc player that has Denon Link HD, the sound localization becomes more precise, with increased detail and definition. The system works by carrying the critical clock timing signals via the dedicated Denon Link HD connection, minimizing the jitter caused by conventional digital connections. This effect can be applied to an audio source of any media from a Blu-ray Disc player. This technology enables the playback of 2-channel source audio or 7.1/5.1 multi-channel source audio through a maximum 11.1-channel speakers, achieving an even broader soundstage.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

11Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 Auro-3D This unit is equipped with an Auro-3D decoder. With Auro-3D, Front Height (FHL + FHR), Surround Height (SHL + SHR), Center Height (CH/optional) and Top Surround (TS/optional) are added to a conventional 5.1-channel system to achieve a natural and realistic sound field that is three-dimensional and fully immersive.

You will be able to fully enjoy Auro-3D playback if you properly place the speakers for Auro-3D.

2 Auro-3D playback

.

FHL FHR SHL SHR

TS

CH

FL FR

SWSL SRC

2 Dolby Atmos playback

.

FHL FHR SHL SHR

TS

FL FR

SWSL SRC

CH

0 Auro-3D does not support a Dolby Atmos configuration using Top Front, Top Middle or Top Rear speakers. But it is possible to support both an Auro-3D and Dolby Atmos by adding Front Height and Rear Height speakers* to a 5.1 configuration. zFor an optimum Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are strongly recommended.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

12Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

High performance 0 Ultimate Home Theater Experience 8K Ready

This unit delivers the ultimate home theater experience with 8K/60Hz pass-through, 4K/120Hz pass-through for gaming, and support for the latest HDMI specifications. This unit allows you to build the best 4K home theater system, and offers the convenience of knowing that the used AV receiver is ready for 8K format whenever the user decides to use it. Enjoy the highest quality 3D audio and video for even the most demanding entertainment needs.

0 HDCP 2.3 This unit is compatible with HDCP 2.3 copyright protection standard.

0 Digital video processor upscales SD (resolution) or HD (720p/ 1080p) / 4K to 8K

.

8K Ultra HD

8K 8K

Up to 1080p/4K 60Hz

8K up scaling

This unit is equipped with a 8K video upscaling function that allows SD (Standard Definition) or HD (High Definition)/4K 60Hz video to be output via HDMI at 8K (7680 4320 pixels) resolution. This function enables the device to be connected to a TV using a single HDMI cable, and produces high definition images for any video source.

0 Equipped with HDMI ZONE2 output (v p. 168) The ZONE2 multi-room output includes an HDMI output that lets you enjoy a different A/V source in that room, with another program playing in the main room.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

13Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 HDMI connections enable connection to various digital AV devices (8 inputs, 3 outputs)

.

8 3 OutIn

For connection to a broad range of digital sources, this unit features 8 HDMI inputs, including 1 on the front panel that lets you quickly and conveniently connect a camcorder, game console or other HDMI- equipped device. There are dual HDMI outputs for the main room, and a third HDMI output for another room.

0 eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) function compatibility The eARC function is compatible with conventional ARC function- compatible audio formats in addition to multichannel linear PCM, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS:X and other audio formats a conventional ARC function cannot transmit. Additionally, connecting to an eARC function-compatible television enables enjoyment of higher-quality surround playback of the audio content played from your television.

0 The device is equipped with a AirPlay function in addition to network functions such as Internet radio etc. (v p. 127)

.

You can enjoy a wide variety of content, including listening to Internet Radio, playing audio files stored on your PC. This unit also supports Apple AirPlay which lets you stream your music library from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or iTunes.

0 Supports AirPlay 2 wireless audio Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous playback. This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

14Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 Playback of DSD and FLAC files via USB and networks This unit supports the playback of high resolution audio formats such as DSD (5.6 MHz) and FLAC 192 kHz files. It provides high quality playback of high resolution files.

0 Wireless connection with Bluetooth devices can be carried out easily (v p. 107)

.

You can enjoy music simply by connecting wirelessly with your smartphone, tablet, PC, etc.

0 Multi-Room audio (v p. 138)

.

MAIN ZONE ZONE2/ZONE3

You can select and play back the respective inputs in MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. In addition, when the All Zone Stereo function is used, the music being played back in MAIN ZONE can be enjoyed in all the zones at the same time. This is useful when you want to let the background music propagate throughout the whole house.

0 Energy-saving design This unit is equipped with an ECO Mode function that allows you to enjoy music and movies while reducing the power consumption during use, and also an auto-standby function that automatically turns off the power supply when the unit is not in use. This helps reduce unnecessary power use.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

15Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 Compatible with the Denon 2016 AVR Remote Appz for performing basic operations of the unit with an iPad, iPhone or Android devices (Google, Amazon Kindle Fire)

.

Along with many new features, the graphics and user interface have been completely overhauled. The new app gives you full control of this unit as well as access to its setup menu for detailed adjustments from your phones or tablets. Denon 2016 AVR Remote App also gives you quick access to the receiver's status display, option menus, Denon Blu- ray Disc player control, and online owner's manual for your convenience. zDownload the appropriate Denon 2016 AVR Remote App for your iOS or

Android devices. This unit needs to be connected to the same LAN or Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) network that the iPad, iPhone or Android is connected to.

0 HEOS provides streaming music from your favorite online music sources

.

HEOS wireless multi-room sound system that enables you to enjoy your favorite music anywhere and everywhere around your home. By utilizing your existing home network and the HEOS App (available for iOS, Android and Amazon devices), you can explore, browse, and play music from your own music library or from many online streaming music services. When multiple products with HEOS Built-in are connected to the same network, they can be grouped to play the same music on all products simultaneously, or different music can be played on each one.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

16Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Easy operation 0 Setup Assistant provides easy-to-follow setup instructions

First select the language when prompted. Then simply follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen to set up the speakers, network, etc.

0 Easy to use Graphical User Interface This unit is equipped with a Graphical User Interface for improved operability.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

17Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Part names and functions Front panel

.

u

rwq e yt

For details, see the next page.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

18Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

u

wq re t y

A Power operation button (X) Used to turn the power of the MAIN ZONE (room where this unit is located) on/off (standby). (v p. 101)

B Power indicator This is lit as follows according to the power status: 0 Green: Power on 0 Off: Normal standby 0 Red: 0 When HDMI Pass Through is set to On (v p. 199) 0 When HDMI Control is set to On (v p. 201) 0 When Network Control is set to Always On (v p. 256)

C SOURCE SELECT knob This selects the input source. (v p. 101)

D Remote control sensor This receives signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)

E Display This displays various pieces of information. (v p. 22)

F MASTER VOLUME knob This adjusts the volume level. (v p. 102)

G Door When you are using buttons and/or connectors behind the door, press the bottom of the door to open it. Be careful not to catch your fingers when closing the door.

.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

19Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

With the door open

.

i o Q0q w r t y ue

A ZONE2 ON/OFF button This turns the power of ZONE2 (another room) on/off. (v p. 173)

B ZONE2 SOURCE button This selects the input source for ZONE2. (v p. 173)

C ZONE3 ON/OFF button This turns the power of ZONE3 (another room) on/off. (v p. 173)

D ZONE3 SOURCE button This selects the input source for ZONE3. (v p. 173)

E STATUS button Each press of this switches the status information that is shown on the display.

F Information button (INFO) This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 271)

G Cursor buttons (uio p) These select items.

H OPTION button This displays the option menu on the TV screen.

I DIMMER button Each press of this switches the brightness of the display. (v p. 266)

J QUICK SELECT buttons With a single press of any of these buttons, you can call up various settings youve registered to each button such as the input source, volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 160)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

20Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

Q6Q3 Q7Q1 Q2 Q5Q4

K AUX1-HDMI connector This is used to connect HDMI output compatible devices such as video camcorders and game consoles. (v p. 91)

L USB port (T) This is used to connect USB storages (such as USB memory devices). (v p. 94)

M BACK button This returns to the previous screen.

N ENTER button This determines the selection.

O SETUP button This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 179)

P SETUP MIC jack This is used to connect the supplied Sound calibration microphone. (v p. 220)

Q Headphones jack (PHONES) This is used to connect headphones. When the headphones are plugged into this jack, audio will no longer be output from the connected speakers or from the PRE OUT connectors.

NOTE 0 To prevent hearing loss, do not raise the volume level excessively when using

headphones.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

21Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Display

.

o Q0 Q1

uy itrewq

A Input signal indicators These light according to the audio input mode settings of each input source. (v p. 216)

B Decoder indicators These light when Dolby or DTS signals are input or when the Dolby or DTS decoder is running.

C Audyssey indicator This lights when MultEQ XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic Volume or Audyssey LFCTM has been set up. (v p. 192)

D Monitor output indicator These light according to the HDMI monitor output setting. When set to Auto(Dual), the indicators light according to connection status.

E MULTI ZONE indicator This lights up when ZONE2 or ZONE3 (another room) power is turned on. (v p. 173)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

22Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

o Q0 Q1

uy i

F Sleep timer indicator This lights when the sleep mode is selected. (v p. 158)

G MUTE indicator This blinks while the sound is muted. (v p. 102)

H Volume indicator I Information display

The input source name, sound mode, setting values and other information are displayed here.

J Front speaker indicator This lights according to the setting of the front A and B speakers.

K Input/output signal channel indicators The channel for input/output signals is displayed according to the setting configured for Channel Indicators. (v p. 267) 0 When Channel Indicators is set to Output (Default)

These light when audio signals are being output from the speakers. 0 When Channel Indicators is set to Input

These light corresponding to the channels that include the input signals. When playing HD Audio sources, the A indicator lights when a signal from an extension channel (a channel other than the front, center, surround, surround back, front height, front wide or LFE channel) is input.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

23Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Rear panel

.

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

SPEAKERS

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)RS-232C

STRAIGHT CABLE

REMOTE CONTROL

IR 1 2

TRIGGER OUT

DC12V 150mA MAX.

PHONO AUDIO

e tr y iw u Q0 Q1q q

Q2 Q7Q5 Q6Q4Q3

o

For details, see the next page.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

24Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

SPEAKERS

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)RS-232C

STRAIGHT CABLE

REMOTE CONTROL

IR 1 2

TRIGGER OUT

DC12V 150mA MAX.

PHONO AUDIO

e tr ywq q

A Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors Used to connect the included external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity when connecting to a network via wireless LAN, or when connecting to a handheld device via Bluetooth. (v p. 96) A Place the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity

evenly over the screw terminal of rear. B Turn clockwise until the antennas is fully connected. C Rotate the antenna upwards for best reception.

.

q w e

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

SPEAKERS

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)RS-232C

STRAIGHT CABLE

REMOTE CONTROL

IR 1 2

TRIGGER OUT

DC12V 150mA MAX.

PHONO AUDIO

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

B Denon Link HD connector Used to connect a Denon Link HD compatible Blu-ray Disc player. (v p. 89)

C USB port (POWER SUPPLY) Can be used to power streaming media players, etc.

0 Use a devices supplied AC adapter when a power supply of 5 V/1.5 A or more is required.

0 Connect to the USB port on the front panel to play content from a USB memory device.

D Analog audio connectors (AUDIO) Used to connect devices equipped with analog audio connectors. 0 Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) (v p. 87) 0 Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player (v p. 88) 0 Connecting a turntable (v p. 92)

E NETWORK connector Used to connect to a LAN cable when connecting to a wired LAN network. (v p. 95)

F 7.1-channel input connectors (7.1CH IN) Used to connect to a device that has multi-channel audio output connectors. (v p. 93)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

25Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

SPEAKERS

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)RS-232C

STRAIGHT CABLE

REMOTE CONTROL

IR 1 2

TRIGGER OUT

DC12V 150mA MAX.

PHONO AUDIO

iu Q0 Q1o

G HDMI connectors Used to connect devices equipped with HDMI connectors. 0 Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and

compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) (v p. 83)

0 Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) (v p. 84)

0 Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) (v p. 87) 0 Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player (v p. 88) 0 Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible with the Denon Link

HD function (v p. 89) 0 Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K (v p. 90)

H PRE OUT connectors Used to connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier or an external power amplifier. 0 Connecting the subwoofer (v p. 43) 0 Connecting an external power amplifier (v p. 81) 0 Connecting ZONE (v p. 168)

I Video connectors (VIDEO) Used to connect devices equipped with video connectors. 0 Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI

connector (v p. 85) 0 Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) (v p. 87) 0 Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player (v p. 88)

J Component video connectors (COMPONENT VIDEO) Used to connect devices equipped with component video connectors. 0 Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI

connector (v p. 85) 0 Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) (v p. 87) 0 Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player (v p. 88)

K AC inlet (AC IN) Used to connect the power cord. (v p. 99)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

26Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

SPEAKERS

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)RS-232C

STRAIGHT CABLE

REMOTE CONTROL

IR 1 2

TRIGGER OUT

DC12V 150mA MAX.

PHONO AUDIO

Q2 Q7Q5 Q6Q4Q3

L SIGNAL GND terminal Used to connect a ground wire for the turntable. (v p. 92)

M TRIGGER OUT jacks Used to connect devices equipped with the trigger function. (v p. 98)

N REMOTE CONTROL jacks Used to connect infrared receivers/transmitters in order to operate this unit and external devices from a different room. (v p. 97)

O RS-232C connector Used to connect home automation controller devices fitted with RS-232C connectors. Consult the owners manual of the home automation controller for more information about serial control of this unit. Perform the operation below beforehand. A Turn on the power of this unit. B Turn off the power of this unit from the external controller. C Check that the unit is in the standby mode.

P Digital audio connectors (DIGITAL AUDIO) Used to connect devices equipped with digital audio connectors. 0 Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and

incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) (v p. 84)

0 Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector (v p. 85)

0 Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) (v p. 87) 0 Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player (v p. 88)

Q Speaker terminals (SPEAKERS) Used to connect speakers. (v p. 42)

NOTE 0 Do not touch the inner pins of the connectors on the rear panel. Electrostatic

discharge may cause permanent damage to the unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

27Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Remote control unit Ap indicator

This is lit when signals are sent from the remote control unit. B AVR operation button

When preset codes are registered to the remote control unit, press this button and then operate the menu on the unit.

C Zone select button (ZONE SELECT) These switch the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2, ZONE3) that is operated through the remote control unit. (v p. 173, 179)

D Display A Zone select indicators B Information indicator

0 This displays AVR when operating this unit. 0 This displays the input source name when operating an external

device. 0 This displays TV when operating TV. 0 This displays details about the setting on the remote control unit.

E Device operation buttons (DEVICE X / DEVICE MENU) These turn the power of external devices on/off and call up menus. Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons. (v p. 274)

F Input source select buttons These select the input source. 0 Selecting the input source (v p. 101) 0 Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (v p. 173)

e w q

r

t

y

q w

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

28Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

G QUICK SELECT buttons (1 4) These call up settings registered to each button, such as input source, volume level and sound mode settings. (v p. 160)

H Channel/page search buttons (CH/PAGE df) These switch pages. (v p. 113)

I MUTE button (:) This mutes the output audio. 0 Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (v p. 102) 0 Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2/

ZONE3) (v p. 174) J Information button (INFO)

This displays the status information on the TV screen. (v p. 271) K Cursor buttons (uio p)

These select items. L BACK button

This returns to the previous screen. M System buttons

These perform playback related operations.

i

o

u

Q3

Q2 Q1 Q0

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

29Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

N Number / Character buttons These enter letters or numbers into the unit. (v p. 274)

O Remote control signal transmitter This transmits signals from the remote control unit. (v p. 9)

P POWER button (X) This turns the power on/off. 0 Turning the power on (v p. 101) 0 Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (v p. 173)

Q TV operation buttons (TV X / TV MENU / TV INPUT) These turn the TV power on/off, switch the TV input and call up menus. Preset codes need to be registered in order to use these buttons. (v p. 279)

R ECO Mode button (G) This switches to ECO Mode. (v p. 259)

S VOLUME buttons (df) These adjust the volume level. 0 Adjusting the volume (v p. 102) 0 Adjusting the volume (ZONE2/ZONE3) (v p. 174)

T OPTION button This displays the option menu on the TV screen.

U ENTER button This determines the selection.

Q7

Q5

Q6

W0

Q8

Q9

W1

W1

Q4

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

30Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

V SETUP button This displays the menu on the TV screen. (v p. 179)

W SOUND MODE buttons These select the sound mode. (v p. 139)

X SLEEP button This sets the sleep timer. (v p. 158)

Y RC SETUP button This used to set up the remote control unit. (v p. 274 290)

Z MACRO buttons (A D) These are used to turn on a TV or player, and consecutive series of operations can be registered to each button. (v p. 284)

W3

W5

W2

W4

W6

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

31Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Contents Speaker installation 33 Connecting speakers 42 Connecting a TV 82 Connecting a playback device 86 Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port 94 Connecting to a home network (LAN) 95 Connecting an external control device 97 Connecting the power cord 99

NOTE 0 Do not plug in the power cord until all connections have been completed.

However, when the Setup Assistant is running, follow the instructions in the Setup Assistant (page 9 in the separate Quick Start Guide) screen for making connections. (During Setup Assistant operation, the input/output connectors do not conduct current.)

0 Do not bundle power cords together with connection cables. Doing so can result in noise.

o Cables used for connections Provide necessary cables according to the devices you want to connect.

Speaker cable .

Subwoofer cable .

HDMI cable .

Component video cable

.

Video cable .

Coaxial digital cable .

Optical cable .

Audio cable .

R

L

R

L

LAN cable .

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

32Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speaker installation Determine the speaker system depending on the number of speakers you are using and install each speaker and subwoofer in the room. Speaker installation is explained using this example of a typical installation.

.

C

FL FR

SBL SBRSB

SW1

SW2 FWL FWR

SL SR

FL/FR (Front speaker left/ right):

Place the FRONT left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position. The distance between each speaker and your TV should also be the same.

C (Center speaker):

Place the CENTER speaker in between the front speakers and above or below your TV.

SL/SR (Surround speaker left/ right):

Place the SURROUND left and right speakers an equal distance to the left and right sides of the main listening position. If you dont have surround back speakers, move the surround speakers slightly behind your listening position.

SBL/SBR (Surround back speaker left/right):

Place the SURROUND BACK left and right speakers an equal distance from the main listening position and directly behind the main listening position. When using a single surround back speaker (SB), place it directly behind the listening position.

FWL/FWR (Front wide speaker left/right):

Place the FRONT WIDE left and right speakers outside of the front left and right speakers so that there is an equal distance between all front speakers.

SW 1/2 (Subwoofer):

Place the SUBWOOFER at a convenient location near the front speakers. If you have two subwoofers, place them asymmetrically across the front of your room.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

33Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

FHL FHR

TRRTRL

TFRTFLRHL RHR TMRTML FHL/FHR

(Front height speaker left/right):

Place the FRONT HEIGHT left and right speakers directly above the front speakers. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aim them towards the main listening position.

TFL/TFR (Top front speaker left/right):

Mount the TOP FRONT left and right speakers on the ceiling slightly in front of your main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

TML/TMR (Top middle speaker left/right):

Mount the TOP MIDDLE left and right speakers directly above the main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

TRL/TRR (Top rear speaker left/right):

Mount the TOP REAR left and right speakers on the ceiling slightly behind your main listening position and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

RHL/RHR (Rear height speaker left/right):

Place the REAR HEIGHT left and right speakers directly behind the main listening position. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aligned with the left and right front speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

34Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

SHL SHR

TS

CH

SHL/SHR (Surround height speaker left/right):

Place the SURROUND HEIGHT left and right speakers directly above the surround speakers.

CH (Center height speaker):

Place the CENTER HEIGHT speaker directly above the center speaker. Mount them as close to the ceiling as possible and aim them towards the main listening position.

TS (Top surround speaker):

Place the TOP SURROUND speaker directly above the main listening position and aligned with the center channel speaker.

0 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

35Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

FDL FDR

BDL BDR

SDL SDR

FDL/FDR (Front Dolby speaker left/right):

Place the FRONT Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on the front speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled integrated with a front speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the front speaker.

SDL/SDR (Surround Dolby speaker left/right):

Place the SURROUND Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on the surround speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker integrated with a surround speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the surround speaker.

BDL/BDR (Back Dolby speaker left/right):

Place the BACK Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker on the surround back speaker. For a Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker integrated with a surround back speaker, place the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker instead of the surround back speaker.

About Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers reflect the sound off the ceiling to allow the sound to come from over your head by using a special upward- pointing speaker that is placed on the floor. You can enjoy the Dolby Atmos 3D sound even in an environment where speakers cannot be installed on the ceiling.

.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

36Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 This unit is compatible with Dolby Atmos and DTS:X which offers an even wider and deeper surround sensation.

0 The Speaker Virtualizer must be set to On for Dolby Atmos playback with 5.1- channel speaker configurations or less. (v p. 183)

0 IMAX DTS:X / DTS:X can be selected regardless of the speaker configuration. 0 Auro-3D recommends adding FRONT HEIGHT and SURROUND HEIGHT

speakers to a 5.1 speaker configuration. Optionally, you may substitute REAR HEIGHT, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers instead of FRONT HEIGHT and SURROUND HEIGHT speakers for Dolby Atmos, DTS:X and Auro-3D playback.

0 Use the illustration below as a guide for how high each speaker should be installed. The height does not need to be exactly the same.

.

z 1

z2 z3

z4 z5 Point slightly downwards

z1 30 - 45 z4 125 - 150

z2 30 - 55 z3 65 - 100 z5 135 - 150

GViewed from the sideH

Top front speaker Top rear speaker

Front speaker

Surround speaker

Surround back speaker

Point slightly downwards

Rear height speaker

Top middle / Top surround speaker Surround height speaker

Front height / Center height speaker

Front wide speaker

.

TS SL

TRL

RHL RHR

FHL

TML

TFL FL

SR

TRR

FHRCH

TMR

TFR FR

C

Height speakers layout

GViewed from the topH

SHRSHL

0 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

37Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o When 7.1-channel speakers are installed using surround back speakers

.

z1 z2 z3

FL

SW C

SL

SBL

FR

SR

SBR Listening position

z1 22 - 30 z2 90 - 110 z3 135 - 150

0 When using a single surround back speaker, place it directly behind the listening position.

o When 9.1-channel speakers are installed using front wide speakers

.

z3 z2 z1

z4

SBL SBR

FL

SW C

SL

FR

SR

FWL FWR

z1 22 - 30 z2 50 - 70 z3 90 - 110 z4 135 - 150

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

38Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o When 5.1-channel speakers are installed

.

z1

z2

FL

SW C

SL

FR

SR

z1 22 - 30 z2 120

o Layout including height speakers and ceiling speakers

n Height speaker layout example Combination of 5.1-channel layout and front height/rear height/center height speakers.

.

FHL FHR

C

FL FR

SWSL SR

RHL RHR

CH

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

39Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n Ceiling speaker layout example Combination of 5.1-channel layout and top front/top middle/top rear speakers.

.

TRRTRL

TFRTFL TMRTML

C

FL FR

SWSL SR

n Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker layout example Combination of 7.1-channel layout and front Dolby/surround Dolby/ back Dolby speakers.

.

CFL FR

FDL FDR

SW

SL SR

SDL SDR

SBL SBR

BDL BDR

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

40Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n Auro-3D layout example Combination of 5.1-channel speakers with front height/surround height/ center height/top surround speakers.

.

FHL FHR SHL SHR

TS

FL FR

SWSL SRC

CH

0 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

41Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting speakers Here we connect the speakers in the room to this unit.

Before connecting speakers NOTE

0 Disconnect this units power plug from the power outlet before connecting the speakers. Also, turn off the subwoofer.

0 Connect so that the speaker cable core wires do not protrude from the speaker terminal. The protection circuit may be activated if the core wires touch the rear panel or if the + and - sides touch each other. (Protection circuit (v p. 336))

0 Never touch the speaker terminals while the power cord is connected. Doing so could result in electric shock. When the Setup Assistant (page 9 in the separate Quick Start Guide) is running, follow the instructions in the Setup Assistant screen for making connections. (Power is not supplied to the speaker terminals while the Setup Assistant is running.)

0 Use speakers with an impedance of 4 16 /ohms.

NOTE 0 Carry out the following settings when using a speaker with an impedance of 4 6

/ohms. 1. Press and hold the main units STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same

time for at least 3 seconds. zVideo Format < PAL> appears on the display.

2. Use u or i on the main unit three times. zSp. Impedance <8ohms> appears on the display.

3. Use o or p on the main unit to select the impedance. 8ohms (Default):

Select when the impedance for all of the connected speakers is 8 /ohms or over.

6ohms: Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 6 /ohms.

4ohms: Select when the impedance for any of the connected speakers is 4 /ohms.

4. Press the main units ENTER to complete the setting.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

42Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Connecting the speaker cables Carefully check the left (L) and right (R) channels and + (red) and (black) polarities on the speakers being connected to this unit, and be sure to connect the channels and polarities correctly.

1 Peel off about 10 mm of sheathing from the tip of the speaker cable, then either twist the core wire tightly or terminate it.

.

2 Turn the speaker terminal counterclockwise to loosen it.

.

3 Insert the speaker cables core wire to the hilt into the speaker terminal.

.

4 Turn the speaker terminal clockwise to tighten it.

.

o Connecting the subwoofer Use a subwoofer cable to connect the subwoofer. Two subwoofers can be connected to this unit. To use two subwoofers, set Subwoofer to 2 spkrs in the Speaker Config. setting. (v p. 238) The level and distance can be set separately for Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer 2.

.

SW1 SW2

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

43Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o About the cable labels (supplied) for channel identification The channel display section for speaker terminals on the rear panel is color-coded for each channel to be identifiable. Attach the cable label corresponding to each speaker to each speaker cable. This makes it easy to connect the correct cable to the speaker terminals on the rear panel.

Speaker Color FRONT L White FRONT R Red CENTER Green SURROUND L Light Blue SURROUND R Blue SURROUND BACK L Beige SURROUND BACK R Brown FRONT WIDE L Glass Green FRONT WIDE R Olive Green FRONT HEIGHT L Light Yellow FRONT HEIGHT R Yellow TOP FRONT L Light Yellow TOP FRONT R Yellow TOP MIDDLE L Pink TOP MIDDLE R Magenta TOP REAR L Light Purple TOP REAR R Purple

Speaker Color SURROUND HEIGHT L Pink SURROUND HEIGHT R Magenta REAR HEIGHT L Light Purple REAR HEIGHT R Purple TOP SURROUND Glass Green CENTER HEIGHT Olive Green FRONT DOLBY L Light Yellow FRONT DOLBY R Yellow SURROUND DOLBY L Pink SURROUND DOLBY R Magenta BACK DOLBY L Light Purple BACK DOLBY R Purple SUBWOOFER 1 Black SUBWOOFER 2 Black

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

44Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Attach the cable label for each channel to its speaker cable as shown in the diagram. Refer to the table and attach the label to each speaker cable. Then, make connection so that the color of the speaker terminal matches that of the cable label.

G How to attach the cable labels H

.

Speaker This unit

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

45Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speaker configuration and Amp Assign settings This unit has a built-in 13-channel power amplifier. In addition to the basic 5.1-channel system, a variety of speaker systems can be configured by changing the Amp Assign settings to suit the application, such as 7.1-channel systems, bi-amp connections and 2-channel systems for multi-zone playback. (v p. 228) Perform Amp Assign settings to suit the number of rooms and speaker configuration to be installed. (v p. 228)

Playback speaker in each zone Amp Assign settings Connection pageMAIN ZONE ZONE2 ZONE3

5.1-channel playback

2-channel (Pre-out) 2-channel (Pre-out)

Can be set in all Amp Assign modes.

48

7.1-channel playback Can be set in all Amp Assign modes except for 5.1ch Full Bi-Amp.

49 9.1-channel playback 54 13.1-channel playback 13.1ch 63 13.1-channel playback (Dolby Atmos and Auro-3D) 13.1ch (Default) 68 11.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers) 11.1ch (Bi-Amp) 74 5.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front, center and surround speakers)

5.1ch Full Bi-Amp 75

Second front speakers 11.1ch + Front B 76 11.1-channel playback 2-channel

(Speaker out) 2-channel (Pre-out) 11.1ch + ZONE2 77

11.1-channel playback 2-channel (Pre-out) 2-channel (Speaker out)

11.1ch + ZONE3 77

9.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers) 2-channel (Speaker out)

2-channel (Pre-out) 9.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2 78

9.1-channel playback 2-channel (Speaker out)

2-channel (Speaker out)

9.1ch + ZONE2/3 79

11.1-channel playback 1-channel (Speaker out)

1-channel (Speaker out)

11.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO 80

13.1-channel playback (using this unit as a pre amplifier) Not used Not used Pre Amplifier 81 The sound mode that can be selected varies according to the speaker configuration. The following pages provide basic connection examples.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

46Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Refer to the example connection for Example connection for the Auro-3D 9.1-channel system (v p. 61) when playing Auro-3D with a 9.1- channel system using the basic 5.1-channel system and the front height and surround height speakers. Also refer to the connection example for Example connection for the Auro-3D 13.1-channel system (v p. 67) when playing Auro-3D with a 13.1-channel system by adding the Surround Back, Top Surround and Center Height speakers.

0 In addition to the connections described in p. 48 - 80, this unit allows for various speaker connections with the Amp Assign setting. Also refer to the menu screen in View Terminal Config. on the Amp Assign setting screen, which shows how to make connections in your environment.

.

CENTER SURROUND SURROUNDFRONTFRONT SURR.BACKSURR. BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1HEIGHT1

F.HEIGHT R.HEIGHTSURR.BACKSURROUNDCENTERFRONT

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

SUBWOOFER 1 2

SUBWOOFER

SPEAKERS

Speakers/Amp Assign

PRE OUT

Assign Mode 13.1ch

Back

ZONE2

HEIGHT4HEIGHT3 HEIGHT3 HEIGHT4

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

47Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting 5.1-channel speakers This serves as a basic 5.1-channel surround system.

.

FL

SW C

SL

FR

SR

.

SW FR FL C SR SL

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

48Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting 7.1-channel speakers o Example connections when using surround back speakers

This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with surround back speakers.

.

FL

SW C

SL

FR

SR

SBRSBL

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & SB in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231)

.

SBR SBLSW FR FL C SR SL

0 When using a single surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK L terminal.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

49Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connections when using front wide speakers This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front wide speakers.

.

FL

SW C

SL

FR

SR

FWL FWR

.

SW FR FL C SR SL

FWR FWL

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & FW in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

50Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connections when using ceiling speakers This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with ceiling speakers.

.

C

FL FR

SWSL SR

TML TMR

.

FR FL C SR SL TMR TMLSW

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch and Height Sp to 2ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231) 0 The top front or top rear speakers can be connected instead of the top middle speakers. In this case, set the ceiling speakers to be connected under Height - Layout in the

menu. (v p. 233)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

51Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connections when using height speakers This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front height speakers.

.

FL

SW C

SL

FHR

FR

SR

FHL

.

FHR FHLFR FL C SR SLSW

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch and Height Sp to 2ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231) 0 The rear height speakers can be connected instead of the front height speakers. In this case, set the height speakers to be connected under Height - Layout in the menu.

(v p. 233)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

52Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connections when using Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers This 7.1-channel surround system is the same as a basic 5.1-channel system but with front Dolby speakers.

.

CSWFL FRSL SR

FDL FDR

.

FDR FDLFR FL C SR SLSW

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch and Dolby Sp to 2ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231, 232) 0 The surround Dolby speakers can be connected instead of the front Dolby speakers. In this case, set the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to be connected under Height -

Layout in the menu. (v p. 233)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

53Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting 9.1-channel speakers o Example connection when using surround back and front wide speakers

.

FL

SW C

SL

FR

SR

SBRSBL

FWL FWR

.

FWR FWL

SBR SBLSW FR FL C SR SL

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & SB & FW in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

54Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connection when using one set of ceiling speakers

.

C

FL FR

SBL SBR

SWSL SR

TML TMR

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & SB and Height Sp to 2ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231)

.

TMR TML

HEIGHT 1z

SW SBR SBLFR FL C SR SL

zThe top front or top rear speakers can be connected instead of the top middle speakers. In this case, set the ceiling speakers to be connected under Height - Layout in the menu. (v p. 233)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

55Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connection when using two sets of ceiling speakers

.

C

FL FR

SWSL SR

TRL TRR

TFL TFR

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch and Height Sp to 4ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231)

.

TRR TRLTFR TFL

HEIGHT 1z HEIGHT 2z

SW FR FL C SR SL

zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 62)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

56Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connection when using one set of height speakers

.

C

FL FR

SBL SBR

SWSL SR

FHL FHR

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & SB and Height Sp to 2ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231)

.

FHR FHL

HEIGHT 1z

SW SBR SBLFR FL C SR SL

zThe rear height speakers can be connected instead of the front height speakers. In this case, set the height speakers to be connected under Height - Layout in the menu. (v p. 233)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

57Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connection when using two sets of height speakers

.

C

FL FR

SWSL SR

FHL FHR RHL RHR

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch and Height Sp to 4ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231) .

RHR RHLFHR FHL

HEIGHT 1z HEIGHT 2z

SW FR FL C SR SL

zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 62)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

58Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connection when using one set of Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

.

C

SBL SBR

SWSL SRFL FR

FDL FDR

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & SB and Dolby Sp to 2ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231, 232)

.

FDR FDL

HEIGHT 1z

SW SBR SBLFR FL C SR SL

zThe surround Dolby or back Dolby speakers can be connected instead of the front Dolby speakers. In this case, set the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to be connected under Height - Layout in the menu. (v p. 233)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

59Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connection when using two sets of Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

.

CSW

SL SR

FL FR

FDL FDR

SDL SDR

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch and Dolby Sp to 4ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231, 232)

.

SDR SDLFDR FDL

HEIGHT 1z HEIGHT 2z

SW FR FL C SR SL

zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 62)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

60Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connection for the Auro-3D 9.1-channel system This speaker configuration is optimized for Auro-3D playback.

.

FL FR

SWSL SRC

FHL FHR

SHL SHR

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch and Height Sp to 4ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231) Next, set Height - Front Layout to Front Height and Rear Layout to Surr. Height. (v p. 234)

.

SHR SHLFHR FHLSW FR FL C SR SL

HEIGHT 1z1 HEIGHT 2z1z2

z1 You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 62)

z2 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

61Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Channels output from the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 speaker terminals can be changed to the following patterns according to the speaker systems being used. Set this from Amp Assign in the menu. (v p. 228)

Combination of height speakers to be used Connected terminals Number of height/ ceiling speakers

Number of Dolby Speakers Combination pattern HEIGHT1 SPEAKER HEIGHT2 SPEAKER

2 speakers None

Front Height Front Height - Top Front Top Front -

Top Middle Top Middle - Top Rear Top Rear -

Rear Height Rear Height -

None 2 speakers Front Dolby Front Dolby -

Surround Dolby Surround Dolby - Back Dolby Back Dolby -

4 speakers None

Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear

Front Height & Rear Height z Front Height Rear Height Front Height & Surr. Height Front Height Surr. Height

Top Front & Top Rear Top Front Top Rear Top Front & Rear Height Top Front Rear Height

Top Middle & Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height

2 speakers 2 speakers Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear

Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby

Top Front & Surr. Dolby Top Front Surround Dolby None 4 speakers Front Dolby & Surround Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby

zFor the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

62Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting 13.1-channel speakers This system, which is based on a 5.1-channel system, plays back up to 13.1-channels at the same time.

o Example connection when using three sets of ceiling speakers

.

C

FL FR

SBL SBR

SW RSLS

TML TMR

TRL TRR

TFL TFR

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & SB and Height Sp to 6ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231)

.

TMR TML

TRR TRLTFR TFL

HEIGHT 1z

HEIGHT 3z

HEIGHT 2z

SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL

zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1, HEIGHT2 and HEIGHT3 channels in the settings. (v p. 69)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

63Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connection when using two sets of height speakers and one set of ceiling speakers

.

C

FL FR

SBL SBR

SW RSLS

TML TMR

FHL FHR RHL RHR

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & SB and Height Sp to 6ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231)

.

TMR TML

HEIGHT 3z

SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL RHR RHLFHR FHL

HEIGHT 1z HEIGHT 2z

zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1, HEIGHT2 and HEIGHT3 channels in the settings. (v p. 69)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

64Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connection when using two sets of height speakers and one set of front wide speakers

.

C

FL FR

SW RSLS

FHL FHR RHL RHR

FWL FWR

SBL SBR

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & SB & FW and Height Sp to 4ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231)

.

FWR FWL

SW FR FL C SR SL RHR RHLFHR FHL

HEIGHT 1z HEIGHT 2z

SBR SBL

zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 channels in the settings. (v p. 69)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

65Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connection when using three sets of Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers

.

C

SBL SBR

SW

SRSL

FL FR

FDL FDR

BDL

SDL SDR

BDR

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & SB and Dolby Sp to 6ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231, 232)

.

SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL BDR BDLFDR FDL

HEIGHT 1z

SDR SDL

HEIGHT 3z

HEIGHT 2z

zYou can change the combination of the HEIGHT1, HEIGHT2 and HEIGHT3 channels in the settings. (v p. 69)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

66Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Example connection for the Auro-3D 13.1-channel system This speaker configuration is optimized for Auro-3D playback.

.

FL FR

SW SRSL C

FHL FHR CH

SHL SHR

TS

SBRSBL

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & SB and Height Sp to 6ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231) Next, set Height - Front Layout to Front Height & Center Height and Middle Layout to Surr. Height & Top Surround. (v p. 234) .

TSCH

SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL SHR SHLFHR FHL

HEIGHT 1z1 HEIGHT 2z1z2

HEIGHT 3z1

z1 You can change the combination of the HEIGHT1, HEIGHT2 and HEIGHT3 channels in the settings. (v p. 69)

z2 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in place of Surround Height speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

67Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting 15.1-channel speakers This system can connect with up to 15.1-channel speakers and simultaneously play up to 13.1-channels for Dolby Atmos and Auro-3D playback. Use the Front Height, Top Middle or Rear Height speakers for Dolby Atmos playback. Use the Front Height, Rear Height, Center Height or Top Surround speakers for Auro-3D playback.

o Example connection

.

TML TMR

CSW RSLS

RHL RHR

SBL SBR

FHL FHR

FL FR

CH

TS

0 Set Floor - Layout to 5ch & SB and Height Sp to 8ch in the menu when connecting in this configuration. (v p. 231)

.

HEIGHT 4

SW FR FL C SR SL SBR SBL RHR RHLFHR FHL

HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2z

TMR TML

HEIGHT 3

TSCH

zUse Surround Height speakers for optimal Auro-3D playback. Install Rear Height speakers instead of Surround Height speakers to enjoy both Auro-3D and Dolby Atmos with 13.1-channel playback.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

68Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

The combination of the HEIGHT1, HEIGHT2, HEIGHT3 and HEIGHT4 channels can be changed to the following patterns according to the speaker system being used. Set this from Amp Assign in the menu. (v p. 228)

Combinations of height speakers to be used Connected speaker terminals

Number of

height / ceiling speakers

Number of Dolby

Speakers Combination pattern HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2 HEIGHT 3

HEIGHT 4/ FRONT

WIDEz1

2ch

2ch None

Front Height Front Height - - - Top Front Top Front - - -

Top Middle Top Middle - - - Top Rear Top Rear - - -

Rear Height Rear Height - - -

None 2ch Front Dolby Front Dolby - - -

Surround Dolby Surround Dolby - - - Back Dolbyz2 Back Dolby - - -

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

69Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Combinations of height speakers to be used Connected speaker terminals

Number of

height / ceiling speakers

Number of Dolby

Speakers Combination pattern HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2 HEIGHT 3

HEIGHT 4/ FRONT

WIDEz1

4ch

2ch 2ch

Front Dolby & Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear - - Front Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height - - Front Height & Surr. Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby - -

Front Height & Back Dolbyz2 Front Height Back Dolby - - Top Front & Surr. Dolby Top Front Surround Dolby - -

Top Front & Back Dolbyz2 Top Front Back Dolby - -

4ch None

Front Height & Top Middle Front Height Top Middle - - Front Height & Top Rear Front Height Top Rear - -

Front Height & Rear Heightz3 Front Height Rear Height - - Front Height & Surr. Height Front Height Surr. Height - -

Top Front & Top Rear Top Front Top Rear - - Top Front & Rear Height Top Front Rear Height - -

Top Middle & Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height - -

None 4ch Front Dolby & Surr. Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby - - Front Dolby & Back Dolbyz2 Front Dolby Back Dolby - -

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

70Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Combinations of height speakers to be used Connected speaker terminals

Number of

height / ceiling speakers

Number of Dolby

Speakers Combination pattern HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2 HEIGHT 3

HEIGHT 4/ FRONT

WIDEz1

5ch 5ch None

Front Height & Rear Height & Top Surroundz3 Front Height Rear Height L: Top Surround -

Front Height & Surr. Height & Top Surround Front Height Surr. Height L: Top Surround -

Front Height & Rear Height & Center Heightz3 Front Height Rear Height R: Center Height -

Front Height & Surr. Height & Center Height Front Height Surr. Height R: Center Height -

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

71Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Combinations of height speakers to be used Connected speaker terminals

Number of

height / ceiling speakers

Number of Dolby

Speakers Combination pattern HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2 HEIGHT 3

HEIGHT 4/ FRONT

WIDEz1

6ch

6ch None

Front Height & Surr. Height & Rear Heightz4 Front Height Rear Height Surr. Height -

Front Height & Rear Height & Top Surround & Center Heightz3 Front Height Rear Height L: Top Surround

R: Center Height -

Front Height & Surr. Height & Top Surround & Center Height Front Height Surr. Height L: Top Surround

R: Center Height - Front Height & Top Middle & Rear

Heightz3z5 Front Height Rear Height Top Middle -

Top Front & Top Middle & Top Rearz5 Top Front Top Rear Top Middle -

4ch 2ch Front Height & Surr. Dolby & Rear

Heightz3 Front Height Rear Height Surround Dolby -

Top Front & Surr. Dolby & Top Rear Top Front Top Rear Surround Dolby -

2ch 4ch

Front Height & Surr. Dolby & Back Dolbyz2 Front Dolby Back Dolby Surround Dolby -

Front Dolby & Top Middle & Back Dolbyz2 Front Dolby Back Dolby Top Middle -

Front Dolby & Surr. Dolby & Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height Surround Dolby -

None 6ch Front Dolby & Surr. Dolby & Back Dolbyz2 Front Dolby Back Dolby Surround Dolby -

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

72Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Combinations of height speakers to be used Connected speaker terminals

Number of

height / ceiling speakers

Number of Dolby

Speakers Combination pattern HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2 HEIGHT 3

HEIGHT 4/ FRONT

WIDEz1

7ch

7ch None Front Height & Top Middle & Rear

Height & Top Surroundz3 Front Height Rear Height Top Middle L: Top Surround

Front Height & Top Middle & Rear Height & Center Heightz3 Front Height Rear Height Top Middle R: Center Height

5ch 2ch Front Height & Surr. Dolby & Rear

Height & Top Surroundz3 Front Height Rear Height Surround Dolby L: Top Surround

Front Height & Surr. Dolby & Rear Height & Center Heightz3 Front Height Rear Height Surround Dolby R: Center Height

8ch 8ch None

Front Height & Top Middle & Rear Height & Top Surround & Center

Heightz3 Front Height Rear Height Top Middle L: Top Surround

R: Center Height

6ch 2ch Front Height & Surr. Dolby & Rear Height & Top Surround & Center

Heightz3 Front Height Rear Height Surround Dolby L: Top Surround

R: Center Height z1 Connect to the HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE speaker terminal to use Front Wide speakers. Set Floor - Layout in the menu to 5ch & FW or 5ch & SB & FW. (v p. 231) z2 This combination can be selected when using Surround Back speakers. z3 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup in

place of Surround Height speakers. z4 Use 2 sets of Height speakers in the appropriate sound modes for Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Auro-3D playback.

Use the Front Height and Rear Height speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback. Use the Front Height and Surround Height speakers for Auro-3D playback.

z5 This combination can be selected when Floor - Layout in the menu to 5ch or 5ch & SB. (v p. 231)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

73Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Bi-amp connection o 11.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers)

This system plays back 11.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers. Bi-amp connection is a method to connect separate amplifiers to the tweeter terminal and woofer terminal of a speaker that supports bi-amplification. This connection enables back EMF (power returned without being output) from the woofer to flow into the tweeter without affecting the sound quality, producing a higher sound quality.

.

CSW RSLS

FHL FHR RHL RHR

SBL SBR

FL (Bi-Amp) (Bi-Amp)

FR

NOTE 0 When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting plate or

wire between the speakers woofer and tweeter terminals.

.

wq

(R)

wq

(L)

SW C SR SL SBR SBL FHR FHLz z RHR RHLz z

FR FL

zThe height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from Height in the menu. (v p. 231)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

74Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o 5.1-channel playback : Bi-amp connection of front, center and surround speakers This system plays back 5.1-channels. You can use the bi-amp connection for all front, center and surround speakers.

.

SW

FL FR

SL SR

C

(Bi-Amp) (Bi-Amp)

(Bi-Amp) (Bi-Amp)

(Bi-Amp)

.

wq wq

(L)

wq

(R)

wq

(R)

wq

(L)

SW

CFLFR

SR SL

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

75Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting 11.1-channel speakers: Second pair of front speakers This system enables switching playback between front speakers A and B as desired.

.

CSW RSLS

FHL FHR RHL RHR

SBL SBR

FL (A)

FL (B)

FR (B)

FR (A)

.

SW C SR SL SBR SBL

FR (B)

FHR FHLz z RHR RHLz z

FL (B)

FR (A)

FL (A)

zThe height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from Height in the menu. (v p. 231)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

76Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting multi-zone speakers o 11.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2 or ZONE3)

This type of configuration plays back 11.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2. (Speakers can output audio from ZONE3 instead of ZONE2 (Assign Mode: 11.1ch + ZONE3)).

.

MAIN ZONE

ZONE2

ZONE2 L

ZONE2 R

CSW RSLS

FHL FHR RHL RHR

SBL SBR

FL FR

.

SW C SRFR FL SL SBR SBL FHR FHLz z RHR RHLz z

ZONE2 R

ZONE2 L

zThe height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from Height in the menu. (v p. 231)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

77Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o 9.1-channel playback (bi-amp connection of front speakers: MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback(ZONE2) This type of configuration plays back 9.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2. You can use the bi-amp connection for front speakers in MAIN ZONE.

.

MAIN ZONE

ZONE2

ZONE2 L

ZONE2 R

CSW RSLS

SBL SBR

FL (Bi-Amp) (Bi-Amp)

FR

FHL FHR

.

wq

(R)

wq

(L)

SW C SR SL SBR SBL FHR FHLz z

FR FL

ZONE2 R

ZONE2 L

zThe height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from Height in the menu. (v p. 231)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

78Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o 9.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 2-channel playback (ZONE2) + 2-channel playback (ZONE3) This type of configuration plays back 9.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 2-channels in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

.

ZONE2 L

ZONE2 R

ZONE3 L

ZONE3 R

MAIN ZONE

3ENOZ2ENOZ

CSW RSLS

SBL SBR

FL FR

FHL FHR

.

SW C SR SL SBR SBL FHR FHLz z

ZONE3 R

ZONE3 L

ZONE2 R

ZONE2 L

FR FL

zThe height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from Height in the menu. (v p. 231)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

79Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o 11.1-channel playback (MAIN ZONE) + 1-channel playback (ZONE2) + 1-channel playback (ZONE3) This type of configuration plays back 11.1-channels in MAIN ZONE and 1-channel (monaural) in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

.

ZONE2 Mono

ZONE3 Mono

MAIN ZONE

3ENOZ2ENOZ

CSW RSLS

FHL FHRRHL RHR

SBL SBR

FL FR

.

SW C SR SL SBR SBL FHR FHLz zFR FL

ZONE3 Mono

ZONE2 Mono

z zRHR RHL

zThe height speakers, ceiling speakers and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers can be connected to the HEIGHT1 and HEIGHT2 speaker terminals. Set the speaker to be connected from Height in the menu. (v p. 231)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

80Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting an external power amplifier You can use this unit as a pre-amp by connecting an external power amplifier to the PRE OUT connectors. By adding a power amplifier to each channel, the realness of the sound can be further enhanced. Select the terminal to use and connect the device.

0 Set Assign Mode to Pre Amplifier if connecting all channels to the Pre-out connectors using an external amplifier. (v p. 230) This stops operation of the internal power amplifier of this unit, reducing interference in the pre amplifier created by the power amplifier.

0 When using just one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel (L) terminal.

1 CBL/SAT

PHONO

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

6 CD

2 DVD

1 2

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME 1 CBL/SAT 1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

2 DVD 3 Blu-ray4 GAME

RS-232C

7.1CH IN

REMOTE CONTROLTRIGGER OUT

(ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) (ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE23 Blu-ray

COAXIAL OPTICAL

STRAIGHT CABLE

IR

DC12V 150mA MAX.

FRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

AC IN Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SPEAKERS

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE PRE OUT

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONT CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1 2 SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

L

L

L

L

R R

RR

L

L

RL

L

R

R R

L

L

RL

L

R

R R

L

L

R

R

L

L

R

R

CENTER

RL

FRONT

RL

AUDIO

SUB- WOOFER

2

AUDIO

SUB- WOOFER

1

AUDIO

RL

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2

RL RL

HEIGHT3 HEIGHT4

RL RL

or

FRONT WIDE SURROUNDSURROUND

BACK

RL

Power amplifier Subwoofer (Primary)

Subwoofer (Secondary)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

81Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a TV Connect a TV to this unit so that the input video is output to the TV. You can also enjoy audio from the TV on this unit. How to connect a TV depends on the connectors and functions equipped on the TV. ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) function plays TV audio on this unit by sending the TV audio signal to this unit via HDMI cable.

.

No

Yes

Is the TV equipped with an HDMI connector?

Yes No

Is the TV compatible with the ARC / eARC?

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) (v p. 83)

Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) (v p. 84)

Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector (v p. 85)

NOTE 0 Use a TV with a 2 prong power plug for this unit. Do not connect a TV with a 3 prong power plug, as this may cause noise.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

82Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connection 1 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and compatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)

Use an HDMI cable to connect a TV that is compatible with the ARC / eARC function to this unit. Set HDMI Control to On or ARC to On when using a TV that supports the ARC function. (v p. 201) Using an eARC function-compatible television enables audio playback from the speaker connected to this unit, regardless of HDMI Control and ARC settings in the menu.

0 When using the ARC / eARC function, connect to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector.

0 eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this setting exists on your television. For more information, check your televisions owners manual.

0 When an ARC and eARC function-compatible television is connected, the eARC function is prioritized.

0 Use a High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet when using an ARC / eARC function-compatible television.

0 Use an Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable to enjoy 8K video. 0 Set 4K/8K Signal Format to 8K Enhanced in the menu to enjoy 8K

video. (v p. 209)

1 CBL/SAT

PHONO

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

6 CD

2 DVD

1 2

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME 1 CBL/SAT 1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

2 DVD 3 Blu-ray4 GAME

RS-232C

7.1CH IN

REMOTE CONTROLTRIGGER OUT

PRE OUT (ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) (ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE23 Blu-ray

COAXIAL OPTICAL

STRAIGHT CABLE

IR

DC12V 150mA MAX.

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONTFRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

2

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

AC IN Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

(ARC / eARC) IN

HDMI

TV

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

83Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connection 2 : TV equipped with an HDMI connector and incompatible with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) / eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel)

Use an HDMI cable to connect the TV to this unit. To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.

.

1 CBL/SAT

PHONO

6 CD

2 DVD

1 2

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME 1 CBL/SAT 1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

2 DVD 3 Blu-ray4 GAME

RS-232C

7.1CH IN

REMOTE CONTROLTRIGGER OUT

PRE OUT (ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) (ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE23 Blu-ray

STRAIGHT CABLE

IR

DC12V 150mA MAX.

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONTFRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO

2

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

AC IN Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

OUT OPTICAL

OUT IN

IN

HDMI

TV

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

84Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connection 3 : TV equipped without an HDMI connector Use a component video or a video cable to connect the TV to this unit. To listen to audio from TV on this unit, use an optical cable to connect the TV to this unit.

.

1 CBL/SAT

PHONO

6 CD

2 DVD

1 2

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME 1 CBL/SAT 1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

2 DVD 3 Blu-ray4 GAME

RS-232C

7.1CH IN

REMOTE CONTROLTRIGGER OUT

PRE OUT (ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO

3 Blu-ray

STRAIGHT CABLE

IR

DC12V 150mA MAX.

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONTFRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO

2

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

AC IN

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

(ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

VIDEO

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE2

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

OUT OPTICAL

OUT

IN VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

Y PB PR

IN

IN

TV

or

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

85Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a playback device This unit is equipped with three types of video input connectors (HDMI, component video and composite video) and three types of audio input connectors (HDMI, digital audio and audio). Select input connectors on this unit according to the connectors equipped on the device you want to connect. If the device connected to this unit is equipped with an HDMI connector, it is recommended to use HDMI connections. In the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable.

0 Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) (v p. 87) 0 Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player (v p. 88) 0 Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible with the Denon Link HD function (v p. 89) 0 Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K (v p. 90) 0 Connecting a video camcorder or game console (v p. 91) 0 Connecting a turntable (v p. 92) 0 Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector (v p. 93)

0 Connect devices to this unit as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit. 0 The source that is assigned to the HDMI IN, DIGITAL AUDIO IN, COMPONENT VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN and AUDIO IN connectors can be changed. See Input Assign on how

to change the input source assigned to the input connectors. (v p. 212) 0 To play back audio signals that are input to this unit on a TV connected via HDMI, set in the menu HDMI Audio Out to TV. (v p. 199) 0 To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

86Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a set-top box (Satellite tuner/cable TV) This explanation uses the connection with a satellite tuner/cable TV STB as an example. Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

.

PHONO

1 2

RS-232C

7.1CH IN

REMOTE CONTROLTRIGGER OUT

PRE OUT VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE2

STRAIGHT CABLE

IR

DC12V 150mA MAX.

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONTFRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1

AUDIO

2

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

AC IN Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

1 CBL/SAT

6 CD

2 DVD

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

4 GAME

(ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO

3 Blu-ray

1 CBL/SAT 2 DVD 3 Blu-ray

(ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO

R L

R L

OUT HDMIOUT

COAXIAL

AUDIO

AUDIO

R L OUT OUT

VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y PB PR

OUT

or or

Satellite tuner / Cable TV

Satellite tuner / Cable TV

(HDMI incompatible device)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

87Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player This explanation uses the connection with a DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player as an example. Select the input connectors on this unit to match the connectors on the device that you want to connect to.

0 When connecting a Blu-ray Disc player that is compatible with Denon Link HD, see Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible with the Denon Link HD function (v p. 89).

PHONO

1 2

RS-232C

7.1CH IN

REMOTE CONTROLTRIGGER OUT

PRE OUT VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE2

STRAIGHT CABLE

IR

DC12V 150mA MAX.

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONTFRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1

AUDIO

2

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

AC IN Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

1 CBL/SAT

6 CD

2 DVD

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

4 GAME

(ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO

3 Blu-ray

1 CBL/SAT 2 DVD 3 Blu-ray

(ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO

R L

R L

OUT HDMI OUT

COAXIAL

AUDIO

AUDIO

R L OUT OUT

VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y PB PR

OUT

OUT HDMI

(HDMI incompatible device) DVD playerDVD player Blu-ray Disc

player

or or

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

88Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a Blu-ray Disc player compatible with the Denon Link HD function By making a Denon Link HD connection to a player compatible with the Denon Link HD function, you can enjoy higher quality playback compared with when only the HDMI connector connection is made.

0 Both HDMI and Denon Link HD connections are required for this connection method.

0 Set Input Mode on the menu to Auto or HDMI. (v p. 216)

1 CBL/SAT

PHONO

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

6 CD

2 DVD

1 2

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME 1 CBL/SAT 1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

2 DVD 3 Blu-ray4 GAME

RS-232C

7.1CH IN

REMOTE CONTROLTRIGGER OUT

PRE OUT (ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) (ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE23 Blu-ray

COAXIAL OPTICAL

STRAIGHT CABLE

IR

DC12V 150mA MAX.

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONTFRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

2

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

AC IN Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

Denon Link HD

Link HD Denon

OUT HDMI

Blu-ray Disc player

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

89Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a player device compatible with the 8K This unit supports 8K HDMI video signals. If your player supports 8K, connect it to the HDMI 7 (8K) connector on your device.

0 To enjoy 8K video, connect an 8K-compatible TV with an Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable.

0 Set 4K/8K Signal Format to 8K Enhanced in the menu to enjoy 8K video. (v p. 209)

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

SPEAKERS

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)RS-232C

STRAIGHT CABLE

REMOTE CONTROL

IR 1 2

TRIGGER OUT

DC12V 150mA MAX.

PHONO AUDIO

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

OUT

HDMI

8K player

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

90Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a video camcorder or game console This explanation uses the connection with a video camcorders as an example. Connect a playback device to this unit, such as a video camcorder or game console.

.

OUT

HDMI

Video camcorder

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

91Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a turntable This unit is compatible with turntables equipped with a moving magnet (MM) phono cartridge. When you connect to a turntable with a low output moving coil (MC) cartridge, use a commercially available MC head amp or a step-up transformer. If you set this units input source to Phono and you accidentally increase the volume without having a turntable connected, you may hear a hum noise from the speakers.

NOTE 0 The earth terminal (SIGNAL GND) of this unit is not for safety grounding

purposes. If this terminal is connected when there is a lot of noise, the noise can be reduced. Note that depending on the turntable, connecting the ground line may have the reverse effect of increasing noise. In this case, it is not necessary to connect the ground line.

1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

6 CD

2 DVD

1 2

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME 1 CBL/SAT 1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

2 DVD 3 Blu-ray4 GAME

RS-232C

7.1CH IN

REMOTE CONTROLTRIGGER OUT

PRE OUT (ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) (ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE23 Blu-ray

COAXIAL OPTICAL

STRAIGHT CABLE

IR

DC12V 150mA MAX.

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONTFRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

2

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

AC IN Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

PHONO AUDIO

GNDAUDIO OUT

L R

(MM cartridge) Turntable

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

92Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a device with a multi-channel output connector You can connect this unit to an external device fitted with multi-channel sound audio output connectors to enjoy music and video. To play analog signals input from 7.1CH IN connectors, set Input Mode to 7.1CH IN. (v p. 216)

0 The video signal can be connected in the same way as a Blu-ray Disc player/DVD player. (v p. 88)

1 CBL/SAT

PHONO

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

6 CD

2 DVD

1 2

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME 1 CBL/SAT 1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

2 DVD 3 Blu-ray4 GAME

RS-232CREMOTE CONTROLTRIGGER OUT

PRE OUT (ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) (ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE23 Blu-ray

COAXIAL OPTICAL

STRAIGHT CABLE

IR

DC12V 150mA MAX.

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONT CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

2

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

AC IN Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

7.1CH IN

FRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK

L

L

R

R

L

L

R

R

L

L

R

R

SUB- WOOFER

CENTERSURROUND

RL

FRONT

RL

AUDIO

Devices with a multi-channel output connector (Blu-ray Disc player, DVD player,

External decoder etc.) SURROUND

BACK

RL

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

93Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting a USB memory device to the USB port Connect to the USB port on the front panel of this unit to play music files saved to a USB memory device. For operating instructions see Playing a USB memory device (v p. 103).

.

USB memory device

0 Denon does not guarantee that all USB memory devices will operate or receive power. When using a portable USB hard disk drive (HDD) which came with an AC adapter, use that devices supplied AC adapter.

0 The USB port on the rear panel can only be used to supply power (5 V/1.5 A). It cannot be used to play music files. (v p. 25)

NOTE 0 USB memory devices will not work via a USB hub. 0 It is not possible to use this unit by connecting the units USB port to a PC via a USB cable. 0 Do not use an extension cable when connecting a USB memory device. This may cause radio interference with other devices.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

94Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting to a home network (LAN) This unit can connect to a network using a wired LAN or wireless LAN. You can connect this unit to your home network (LAN) to enable various types of playback and operations as described below. 0 Playback of network audio such as Internet Radio and from your media

server(s) 0 Playback of streaming music services 0 Using the Apple AirPlay function 0 Operation on this unit via the network 0 Operation with the HEOS wireless multi-room sound system 0 Firmware Update For connections to the Internet, contact an ISP (Internet Service Provider) or a computer shop.

Wired LAN To make connections via wired LAN, use a LAN cable to connect the router to this unit as shown in the figure below.

.

1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

6 CD

2 DVD

1 2

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME 1 CBL/SAT 1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

2 DVD 3 Blu-ray4 GAME

7.1CH IN

PRE OUT (ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) (ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE23 Blu-ray

STRAIGHT CABLEDC12V 150mA MAX.

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONTFRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

2

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

HEIGHT4/FRHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

Internet

Modem

PC

Router

To WAN side

To LAN port To LAN port

NAS (Network Attached

Storage)

LAN port / Ethernet

connector

LAN port / Ethernet

connector

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

95Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Wireless LAN When connecting to the network via wireless LAN, connect the external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless connectivity connection to the rear panel and stand them upright. See Wi-Fi Setup on how to connect to a wireless LAN router. (v p. 252)

.

Internet Modem

Router with access point

To WAN side

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

SPEAKERS

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

COAXIAL OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)RS-232C

STRAIGHT CABLE

REMOTE CONTROL

IR 1 2

TRIGGER OUT

DC12V 150mA MAX.

PHONO AUDIO

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

0 When using this unit, we recommend you use a router equipped with the following functions: 0 Built-in DHCP server

This function automatically assigns IP addresses on the LAN. 0 Built-in 100BASE-TX switch

When connecting multiple devices, we recommend a switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.

0 Only use a shielded STP or ScTP LAN cable (readily available at electronics stores). (CAT-5 or greater recommended)

0 The normal shielded-type LAN cable is recommended. If a flat-type cable or unshielded-type cable is used, other devices could be affected by noise.

0 When using this unit connected to a network with no DHCP function, configure the IP address, etc. in Network. (v p. 251)

NOTE 0 The types of routers that can be used depend on the ISP. Contact your ISP or a

computer shop for details. 0 This unit is not compatible with PPPoE. A PPPoE compatible router is required if

your contracted line is not set using PPPoE. 0 Do not connect a NETWORK connector directly to the LAN port / Ethernet

connector on your computer. 0 Various online services may be discontinued without prior notice.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

96Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting an external control device REMOTE CONTROL jacks

When this unit is installed in a location where the remote control signals cannot reach (installation in a cabinet etc.), it can still be controlled by the remote control by connecting a remote control receiver unit (sold separately). You can also use it to remotely control ZONE2 and ZONE3 (another rooms).

.

1 CBL/SAT

PHONO

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

6 CD

2 DVD

1 2

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME 1 CBL/SAT 1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

2 DVD 3 Blu-ray4 GAME

RS-232C

7.1CH IN

TRIGGER OUT

PRE OUT (ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) (ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE23 Blu-ray

COAXIAL OPTICAL

STRAIGHT CABLEDC12V 150mA MAX.

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONTFRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

2

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

AC IN Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

REMOTE CONTROL

IR

AUX OUT OutputInput

Device fitted with REMOTE CONTROL IN connectors

Infrared retransmitter Infrared

sensor

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

97Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TRIGGER OUT jacks When a device with TRIGGER IN jack is connected, the connected devices power on/standby can be controlled through linked operation to this unit. The TRIGGER OUT jack outputs a maximum 12 V DC/150 mA electrical signal.

.

1 CBL/SAT

PHONO

2 DVD1 CBL/SAT 2 CD1 TV AUDIO

6 CD

2 DVD

3 Blu-ray

5 MEDIA PLAYER

4 GAME 1 CBL/SAT 1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

2 DVD 3 Blu-ray4 GAME

RS-232C

7.1CH IN

REMOTE CONTROL

PRE OUT (ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) (ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE23 Blu-ray

COAXIAL OPTICAL

STRAIGHT CABLE

IR

ZONE2 ZONE3

FRONTFRONT

SURROUND CENTER SUBWOOFER

SURROUND BACK CENTER

SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1

AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO (ASSIGNABLE)

2

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

AC IN Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

FRONT

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE 1 2

TRIGGER OUT

DC12V 150mA MAX.

12 V DC/150 mA trigger-compatible device

NOTE 0 Use a monaural mini-plug cable for connecting the TRIGGER OUT jacks. Do not use a stereo mini-plug cable. 0 If the permissible trigger input level for the connected device is larger than 12 V DC/150 mA, or has shorted, the TRIGGER OUT jack cannot be used. In this case, turn off the

power to the unit, and disconnect it.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

98Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Connecting the power cord After completing all the connections, insert the power plug into the power outlet.

.

1 CBL/SAT 1 CBL/SAT

2 DVD

2 DVD 3 Blu-ray4 GAME

(ASSIGNABLE) VIDEO VIDEO

(ASSIGNABLE) (ASSIGNABLE) COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO

MONITOR

MONITOR/ZONE3

ZONE23 Blu-ray

CENTER

K HEIGHT2 HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

1 2

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi ANTENNA

Y

PB/ CB

PR/ CR

SPEAKERS

SUBWOOFER

HEIGHT1 HEIGHT3

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDEHEIGHT3 HEIGHT3

SURROUND BACK SURROUND BACK HEIGHT1 HEIGHT1 HEIGHT2 HEIGHT2

HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE

AC IN

Power cord (supplied)

(AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz) To household power outlet

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

99Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Contents

Basic operation Turning the power on 101 Selecting the input source 101 Adjusting the volume 102 Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) 102 Selecting a sound mode 139

Playback a device Playing a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player 102 Playing a USB memory device 103 Listening to music on a Bluetooth device 107

Playback network audio/service Listening to Internet Radio 112 Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS 114 Getting the HEOS App 118 AirPlay function 127 Spotify Connect function 130

Convenience functions Convenience functions 131 HDMI Control function 155 Smart Menu function 156 Sleep timer function 158 Quick select plus function 160 Panel lock function 163 Remote lock function 165

Other functions Web control function 166 Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room) 168

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

100Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Basic operation

.

USB

VOLUME df

POWER X

MUTE :

Input source select buttons

Turning the power on 1 Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.

0 You can press the input source select button when the unit is in standby mode to turn on the power.

0 You can also switch the power to standby by pressing X on the main unit.

Selecting the input source 1 Press the input source select button to be played back.

The desired input source can be selected directly.

0 You can also select the input source by turning SOURCE SELECT on the main unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

101Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the volume 1 Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume.

0 The variable range differs according to the input signal and channel level setting. 0 You can also adjust the master volume by turning MASTER VOLUME on the main

unit.

Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting)

1 Press MUTE :. 0 MUTE indicator on the display flashes. 0 : appears on the TV screen.

0 The sound is reduced to the level set at Mute Level in the menu. (v p. 191) 0 To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE : again.

Playback a DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player

The following describes the procedure for playing DVD player/Blu-ray Disc player.

1 Prepare for playback. A Turn on the power of the TV, subwoofer and player. B Change the TV input to the input of this unit.

2 Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.

3 Press DVD or Blu-ray to switch an input source for a player used for playback.

4 Play the DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player.

o Surround playback (v p. 139)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

102Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing a USB memory device

.

USB

uio p ENTER

CH/PAGE df

BACK

OPTION

USB

1 89 3 2

0 Playing back music files stored on a USB memory device. 0 Only USB memory devices conforming to mass storage class standards

can be played on this unit. 0 This unit is compatible with USB memory devices in FAT32 or NTFS

format. 0 The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for

playback are as follows. See Playing back a USB memory devices (v p. 323) for details. 0 WMA 0 MP3 0 WAV 0 MPEG-4 AAC 0 FLAC 0 Apple Lossless 0 DSD

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

103Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing files stored on USB memory devices

1 Insert a FAT32 or NTFS formatted USB memory device into the USB port.

2 Press USB to switch the input source to USB.

3 Select the name of this unit.

4 Browse the music on your USB memory device and select something to play.

0 When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now: Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.

Play Now & Replace Queue:

Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.

Play Next: Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.

Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.

.

Nature 01

Nature 02

Nature 03

Nature 04

Various Artists

Various Artists

Various Artists

Various Artists

Nature 05 Various Artists

USB Music -

Naure 01

Play Now

Play Next

Add to End of Queue

Play Now & Replace Queue

Nature

Cancel

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

104Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

5 Use ui to select the Play Now or Play Now & Replace Queue, then press ENTER. Playback starts.

.

Nature 01 - Various Artists

NOW PLAYING

-2:212:45

Nature

Operation buttons Function 1 Playback 3 Pause 2 Stop 89 Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

CH/PAGE df Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

0 When an MP3 music file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while playing the file.

NOTE 0 Note that Denon will accept no responsibility whatsoever for any problems arising with

the data on a USB memory device when using this unit in conjunction with the USB memory device.

0 When a USB memory device is connected to this unit, the unit loads all of the files on the USB memory device. Loading may take a while if the USB memory device contains a large number of folders and/or files.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

105Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Operations accessible through the option menu 0 Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer) (v p. 133) 0 Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust) (v p. 134) 0 Adjusting the tone (Tone) (v p. 135) 0 Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select) (v p. 136) 0 Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo) (v p. 138)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

106Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to music on a Bluetooth device

.

USB

OPTION

Bluetooth

1 89 3 2

BACK

POWER X

Music files stored on Bluetooth devices such as smartphones, digital music players, etc. can be enjoyed on this unit by pairing and connecting this unit with the Bluetooth device. Communication is possible up to a range of about 30 m.

NOTE 0 To play back music from a Bluetooth device, the Bluetooth device needs to

support the A2DP profile.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

107Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing music from Bluetooth device In order to enjoy music from a Bluetooth device on this unit, the Bluetooth device must first be paired with this unit. Once the Bluetooth device has been paired, it does not need to be paired again.

1 Prepare for playback. A Connect the supplied external antennas for Bluetooth/wireless

connectivity to the Bluetooth/wireless LAN antenna connectors on the rear panel. (v p. 25)

B Press POWER X to turn on power to the unit.

2 Press Bluetooth. When using for the first time, the unit will go into the pairing mode automatically and Pairing... will appear on the display of the unit.

3 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.

4 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device. Connect to the Bluetooth device while Pairing is being displayed on the display of the unit. Perform the connection with the Bluetooth device close to the unit (about 1 m).

5 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device. 0 The Bluetooth device can also be operated with the remote

control of this unit. 0 The next time the Bluetooth button is pressed on the remote

control unit, this unit automatically connects to the last Bluetooth device that was connected.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

108Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operation buttons Function 1 Playback 3 Pause 2 Stop 89 Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

0 Press STATUS on this unit during playback to switch the display between Title name, Artist name, Album name, etc.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

109Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Pairing with other Bluetooth devices Pair a Bluetooth device with this unit.

1 Activate the Bluetooth settings on your mobile device.

2 Press and hold Bluetooth on the remote control unit for at least 3 seconds. This unit will go into the pairing mode.

3 Select this unit when its name appears in the list of devices displayed on the screen of the Bluetooth device.

0 This unit can be paired with a maximum of 8 Bluetooth devices. When a 9th Bluetooth device is paired, it will be registered in place of the oldest registered device.

0 You can also enter pairing mode by pressing the OPTION button when the Bluetooth playback screen is displayed and selecting Pairing Mode from the displayed option menu.

NOTE 0 To operate the Bluetooth device with the remote control of this unit, the Bluetooth

device needs to support the AVRCP profile. 0 The remote control of this unit is not guaranteed to work with all Bluetooth devices. 0 Depending on the type of Bluetooth device, this unit outputs audio that is coupled

to the volume setting on the Bluetooth device.

o Operations accessible through the option menu 0 Pairing with other Bluetooth devices (v p. 110) 0 Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer) (v p. 133) 0 Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust) (v p. 134) 0 Adjusting the tone (Tone) (v p. 135) 0 Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select) (v p. 136) 0 Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo) (v p. 138)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

110Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Reconnecting to this unit from a Bluetooth device

After pairing is completed, the Bluetooth device can be connected without performing any operations on this unit. This operation also needs to be performed when switching the Bluetooth device for playback.

1 If a Bluetooth device is currently connected, deactivate the Bluetooth setting of that device to disconnect it.

2 Activate the Bluetooth setting of the Bluetooth device to be connected.

3 Select this unit from the Bluetooth device list on your Bluetooth device.

4 Play music using any app on your Bluetooth device.

0 The screen automatically switches to the Bluetooth playback screen if a Bluetooth device is connected while the power of this unit is on.

0 When the Network Control setting of this unit is set to Always On and a Bluetooth device is connected with the unit in the standby state, the power of the unit will be turned on automatically. (v p. 256)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

111Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to Internet Radio

.

USB

uio p ENTER

CH/PAGE df

BACK

OPTION

INTERNET RADIO

(HEOS Music)

1

89 3

2

0 Internet Radio refers to radio broadcasts distributed over the Internet. Internet Radio stations from around the world can be received.

0 The Internet Radio station list on this unit the database service provided by TuneIn Radio service.

0 The audio format types and specifications supported by this unit for playback are as follows. See Playing back Internet Radio (v p. 326) for details. 0 WMA 0 MP3 0 MPEG-4 AAC

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

112Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to Internet Radio 1 Press INTERNET RADIO.

0 You can also press R (HEOS Music). Use ui to select TuneIn Internet Radio, then press ENTER.

2 Select the station you want to play.

Operation buttons Function 1 Playback 3z Pause 2 Stop 89z Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

CH/PAGE df Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

z Enabled when playing Podcasts.

0 The display switches between track title and radio station name etc. each time the main units STATUS is pressed.

NOTE 0 The radio station database service may be suspended or be otherwise unavailable

without notice.

o Operations accessible through the option menu 0 Adding to HEOS Favorites (v p. 132) 0 Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer) (v p. 133) 0 Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust) (v p. 134) 0 Adjusting the tone (Tone) (v p. 135) 0 Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select) (v p. 136) 0 Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo) (v p. 138)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

113Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS

.

USB

uio p ENTER

CH/PAGE df

BACK

OPTION

1 89 3 2

(HEOS Music)

0 This unit can play back music files and playlists (m3u, wpl) from DLNA compatible servers including PCs and NAS devices on your network.

0 Supported file formats: For details, see Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS (v p. 325). 0 WMA 0 MP3 0 WAV 0 MPEG-4 AAC 0 FLAC 0 Apple Lossless 0 DSD

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

114Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back files stored on a PC or NAS

Use this procedure to play music files or playlists stored on DLNA files servers on your local network.

1 Press R (HEOS Music).

2 Use ui to select Music Servers, then press ENTER.

.

MUSIC

USB Music

Music Servers

HEOS Favorites

TuneIn Internet Radio

3 Select the name of your networked PC or NAS (Network Attached Storage) server.

4 Browse the music on your PC/NAS and select something to play.

0 When you select something to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now: Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.

Play Now & Replace Queue:

Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.

Play Next: Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.

Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.

.

Live 01

Live 02

Live 03

Live 04

Various Artists

Various Artists

Various Artists

Various Artists

Live 05 Various Artists

Music Servers -

Live 01

Play Now

Play Next

Add to End of Queue

Play Now & Replace Queue

Live

Cancel

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

115Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

5 Use ui to select the Play Now or Play Now & Replace Queue, then press ENTER. Playback starts.

.

Live 01 - Various Artists

NOW PLAYING

-2:212:45

Live

Operation buttons Function 1 Playback 3 Pause 2 Stop 89 Skip to previous track / Skip to next track

CH/PAGE df Switch to the previous page/next page in the list display

0 The display switches between track title, artist name, and album title each time the main units STATUS is pressed.

0 When a WMA (Windows Media Audio), MP3 or MPEG-4 AAC file includes album art data, the album art can be displayed while the music files are playing.

0 If you use Ver.11 or later of Windows Media Player, the album art for WMA files can be displayed.

NOTE 0 When playing back music files with your PC or NAS connected through wireless

LAN, audio may be interrupted depending on your wireless LAN environment. In this case, connect using a wired LAN.

0 The order in which the tracks/files are displayed depends on the server specifications. If the tracks/files are not displayed in alphabetical order due to the server specifications, searching by the first letter may not work properly.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

116Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Operations accessible through the option menu 0 Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog

Enhancer) (v p. 133) 0 Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust) (v p. 134) 0 Adjusting the tone (Tone) (v p. 135) 0 Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select) (v p. 136) 0 Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo) (v p. 138)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

117Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Getting the HEOS App You can use many online music streaming services from the HEOS App. Depending upon your geographical location, there are several options to choose from. Download the HEOS App for iOS or Android by searching App Store, Google Play store or Amazon Appstore for HEOS.

.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

118Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

HEOS Account HEOS Accounts can be registered in HEOS Account (v p. 258) in the menu of this unit or by tapping Music tab - Settings icon a in the HEOS App.

o What is a HEOS Account? A HEOS Account is master account or keychain for managing all of your HEOS music services with one single username and password.

o Why do I need a HEOS Account? With the HEOS Account you just have to enter your music services login names and passwords one time. This allows you to easily and quickly use multiple controller apps on different devices. You just log into your HEOS Account on any device and you will have access to all of your associated music services, play history and custom playlists, even if you are at a friends house listening to music on their HEOS system.

o Signing up for a HEOS Account You will be instructed to signup for a HEOS Account the first time you try to access any music service from the main Music menu of the HEOS App.

o Changing your HEOS Account

1 Tap the Music tab.

2 Select the Settings icon a in the upper left corner of the screen.

3 Select HEOS Account.

4 Change your location, change your password, delete your account or sign out of your account.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

119Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing from streaming music services A music service is an online music company that provides access to vast music collections via free and/or paid subscriptions. Depending upon your geographical location, there are several options to choose from.

NOTE 0 The HEOS App and brand is not affiliated with any manufacturer of any mobile

device. Availability of music services may vary by region. Not all services may be available at time of purchase. Some services may be added or discontinued from time to time based on decisions of the music service providers or others.

o Selecting a room/device

1 Tap the Rooms tab, and select Denon AVC-X8500H if there are multiple products with HEOS Built-in.

0 Tap the Pencil icon e at the top right to switch edit mode. You can change the displayed name.

.

Rooms

Drag one room into another to group them

Rooms

Now PlayingMusic

Song Name 3 Denon AVC-X8500H

Song Name 1 Dining L + Dining R

Song Name 2 Kitchen

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

120Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Selecting the music track or station from music sources

1 Tap the Music tab and select a music source.

0 All music services displayed may not be available in your location.

.

Now PlayingMusicRooms

This Phone

Music

Music Servers USB Music

Playlists History

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

121Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

2 Browse the music to play. After selecting a music track or radio station the app will automatically change to the Now Playing screen.

0 When you select a music track to play you will be asked how you want to queue up your music.

Play Now: Inserts the item into the queue after the currently playing track and plays the selected item immediately.

Play Now & Replace Queue:

Clears the queue and plays the selected item immediately.

Play Next: Inserts the item into the queue after the current song and plays it when the current song ends.

Add to End of Queue: Adds the item to the end of the queue.

0 When you select a radio station the following items are displayed.

Play Now: Plays the selected item immediately. Add to HEOS Favorites: Adds to HEOS Favorites.

.

MusicRooms Now Playing

Album

Album

Play Now

Cancel

Play Now & Replace Queue

Play Next

Add to End of Queue

Track 01 Rooms

10 Tracks,60 Mins.,2014

Artist

MusicRooms Now Playing

Track 01

Album

0:50 -2:51

Artist

Now Playing

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

122Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Listening to the same music in multiple rooms

This system is a true multi-room audio system. You can create one or more HEOS groups to automatically synchronize audio playback between multiple products with HEOS Built-in so that the music playing different rooms is perfectly in sync and always sounds amazing! You can easily add up to 32 products to your system in total. You can group up to 16 individual products to have them play the same song fully synchronized.

o Grouping rooms

1 Press and hold your finger on room that is not playing music.

2 Drag it into the room that is playing music (indicated by the red outline) and lift your finger.

3 The two rooms will be grouped together into a single device group and both rooms will be playing the same music in perfect sync.

0 When audio from the device connected to this unit is played back in a group, only 2-channel PCM input from the HDMI, digital or analog terminals can be played back.

.

21 3

Now PlayingMusicRooms

Song Name 1 Dining

Kitchen

Drag one room into another to group them

Rooms

Now PlayingMusicRooms

Song Name 3

Song Name 3

Song Name 2

Song Name 2

Song Name 1

Bedroom

Bedroom

Dining

Living Kitchen

Drag one room into another to group them

Rooms

Living

Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it

Living+Kitchen

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

123Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Ungrouping rooms

1 Press and hold your finger on room that you want to remove from the group.

2 Drag it out of the group and lift your finger.

NOTE 0 You can not remove the first room that started playing the music before grouping.

.

21 Song Name 3

Song Name 2

Song Name 1

Bedroom

Dining

Living

Kitchen

Drag one room into another to group them

Rooms

Song Name 4

Song Name 3

Song Name 2

Song Name 1

Bedroom

Dining

Living

Kitchen

Drag one room into another to group them

Rooms

Living

Now PlayingMusicRoomsNow PlayingMusicRooms

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

124Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Grouping all rooms (party mode) You can easily group 16 rooms together into Party Mode by using a "pinch" gesture.

1 Place two fingers on the screen over the list of rooms.

2 Quickly pinch your two fingers together and release.

3 All of your rooms will be joined together and begin playing the same music in perfect sync.

.

1

2

3Song Name 1

Bedroom

Dining

Kitchen

Drag one room into another to group them

Rooms

Song Name 4

Song Name 3

Song Name 2

Song Name 1

Bedroom

Dining

Living

Kitchen

Drag one room into another to group them

Rooms

Living

Now PlayingMusicRooms Now PlayingMusicRooms

Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it

Dining+Living+...

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

125Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Ungrouping all rooms You can easily ungroup all of your rooms and exit Party Mode by using a "spread" gesture.

1 Place two fingers close together on the screen over list of rooms.

2 Quickly spread your two fingers apart from each other and release.

3 All of your rooms will be ungrouped.

.

1

2 3

Song Name 1

Bedroom

Dining

Dining

Kitchen

Drag one room into another to group them

Rooms

Song Name 4

Song Name 3

Song Name 2

Song Name 1

Bedroom

Dining

Living

Kitchen

Drag one room into another to group them

Rooms

Living

Now PlayingMusicRoomsNow PlayingMusicRooms

Drag a room out of this group to ungroup it

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

126Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

AirPlay function Music files stored on your iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes can be played on this unit via the network.

0 Source input will be switched to HEOS Music when AirPlay playback is started. 0 You can stop AirPlay playback by choosing other input source. 0 To see song and artist names together, press STATUS on the main unit. 0 For information about how to use iTunes, also see the Help for iTunes. 0 The screen may differ depending on the OS and software versions.

This unit supports AirPlay 2. Sync multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices/speakers for simultaneous playback.

0 This unit supports AirPlay 2 and requires iOS 11.4 or later.

.

PC Router This unit

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

127Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing songs from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad

If you update your iPhone/iPod touch/iPad to iOS 4.2.1 or later, you can stream music stored in your iPhone/iPod touch/iPad directly to this unit.

1 Connect your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad Wi-Fi to the same network as this unit. 0 For details, see your devices manual.

2 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad. AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.

3 Tap the AirPlay icon and select this unit.

.

AirPlayDrop:Air ryone

[Example] iOS 12 [Example] iOS 10

Playing iTunes music with this unit 1 Install iTunes 10, or later, on a Mac or Windows PC that

is connected to the same network as this unit.

2 Turn this unit ON. Set Network Control to Always On for this unit. (v p. 256)

NOTE 0 When Network Control is set to Always On, the unit consumes more

standby power.

3 Start iTunes and click the AirPlay icon to select this unit.

.

[Example] iTunes

4 Choose a song and click play in iTunes. The music will stream to this unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

128Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

NOTE 0 In playback using the AirPlay function, the sound is output at the iPhone, iPod

touch, iPad or iTunes volume setting level. You should turn down the iPhone, iPod touch, iPad or iTunes volume prior to playback and then adjust it to a suitable level.

Play a song from your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad on multiple synced devices (AirPlay 2)

Songs from an iPhone, iPod touch or iPad operating iOS 11.4 or later can be synced with multiple AirPlay 2 supported devices for simultaneous playback.

1 Play the song on your iPhone, iPod touch or iPad. AirPlay icon is displayed on the iPhone, iPod touch or iPad screen.

.

2 Tap the AirPlay icon. Displays a list of devices/speakers that can be played back on the same network. 0 A circle is displayed to the right of AirPlay 2 compatible devices.

.

Speakers

Denon xxxxxxxx

iPhone

3 Tap the devices/speakers you want to use. 0 Multiple AirPlay 2 compatible devices can be selected. 0 Volume can be adjusted for each device individually or for all

synced devices simultaneously.

.

iPhone

Speakers

Denon xxxxxxxx

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

129Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Spotify Connect function Spotify is all the music youll ever need. Millions of songs available instantly. Just search for the music you love, or let Spotify play you something great. Spotify works on your phone, tablet, computer and home speakers. So youll always have the perfect soundtrack for whatever youre doing. Now you can enjoy Spotify with your free account as well as Premium account. Use your phone, tablet or computer as a remote control for Spotify. Go to www.spotify.com/connect to learn how. The Spotify software is subject to third party licenses found here: www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses

.

Spotify server

Control

This unit

Spotify App

Audio streaming /

control

Playing Spotify music with this unit Download the Spotify App onto your Android or iOS device beforehand.

1 Connect the Wi-Fi settings of the iOS or Android device in the same network as this unit.

2 Launch the Spotify App.

3 Play back the Spotify track.

4 Tap the Spotify icon F to select the unit. The music will stream to this unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

130Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Convenience functions

.

USB

uio p ENTER

OPTION

(HEOS Music)

This section explains how to use convenient functions that can be used for each input source. These functions can only be set in the MAIN ZONE.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

131Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adding to HEOS Favorites 1 While content is playing, press OPTION.

The option menu screen is displayed.

2 Use ui to select Add to HEOS Favorites, then press ENTER.

Playing back HEOS Favorites 1 Press R (HEOS Music).

2 Use ui to select HEOS Favorites, then press ENTER.

.

MUSIC

USB Music

Music Servers

HEOS Favorites

TuneIn Internet Radio

3 Browse the content and select something to play.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

132Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Deleting a HEOS Favorites 1 While the HEOS Favorites content list is displayed, use

ui to select the item you want to remove from HEOS Favorites, then press OPTION.

2 Use ui to select Remove from HEOS Favorites, then press ENTER.

Adjusting the audibility of dialog and vocals (Dialog Enhancer)

This function adjusts the center channel frequency band to enhance the dialog in the movies and vocals in music for easier listening.

1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is HEOS Music, an option menu for

online music is displayed. Select AVR Options, then press ENTER.

2 Use ui to select Dialog Enhancer, then press ENTER. The Dialog Enhancer screen is displayed.

3 Use op to select your favorite enhancement effect.

Off (Default): Does not enhance the dialog or vocals. Low / Medium / High: Enhances the dialog and vocals.

4 Press ENTER.

0 Dialog Enhancer settings are stored for each source. 0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to Direct, Virtual or Pure

Direct. 0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to 7.1CH IN.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

133Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source (Channel Level Adjust)

The volume of each channel can be changed while listening to music. You can set this for each input source.

1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is HEOS Music, an option menu for

online music is displayed. Select AVR Options, then press ENTER.

2 Use ui to select Channel Level Adjust, then press ENTER. The Channel Level Adjust screen is displayed.

3 Use ui to select the channel that you wish to adjust.

4 Use o p to adjust the volume.

12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

5 Use uio p to select Exit, then press ENTER.

0 Select Reset and press ENTER if you want to restore the adjustment values of the various channels to 0.0 dB (Default).

0 Headphone volume can be adjusted when a headphone is connected. 0 Channel Level Adjust settings are stored for each input source. 0 You can only set this for speakers that output audio. In addition, you cannot set

this when in the menu HDMI Audio Out is set to TV. (v p. 199)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

134Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the tone (Tone) Adjusts the tonal quality of the sound.

1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is HEOS Music, an option menu for

online music is displayed. Select AVR Options, then press ENTER.

2 Use ui to select Tone, then press ENTER. The Tone screen is displayed.

3 Use o p to set the tone control function to on/off.

On: Allow tone adjustment (bass, treble). Off (Default): Playback without tone adjustment.

4 Select On in step 3 and press i to select the sound range to be adjusted. Bass: Adjust bass. Treble: Adjust treble.

5 Use o p to adjust the tone, then press ENTER.

-6 dB +6 dB (Default : 0 dB)

0 Tone settings are stored for each input source. 0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to Direct or Pure Direct. 0 This item cannot be set when Dynamic EQ is set to On. (v p. 193) 0 You cannot set this when no audio signal is input or in the menu HDMI Audio Out

is set to TV. (v p. 199) 0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to 7.1CH IN.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

135Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video Select)

This unit can display video from a different source on TV during audio playback. You can set this for each input source. n Supported input sources:

CDz / Tuner / HEOS Music / Phono zThis cannot be set when any of the HDMI, component video or video

connectors are assigned.

1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is HEOS Music, an option menu for

online music is displayed. Select AVR Options, then press ENTER.

2 Use ui to select Video Select, then press ENTER. The Video Select screen is displayed.

3 Use o p to select the Video Select mode.

Off (Default): Disable Video Select mode. On: Enable Video Select mode.

4 If you selected On in step 3, press i and select Source.

5 Use o p to select the input source for video you want to play back, then press ENTER.

0 Video Select settings are stored for each input source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

136Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment (Picture Mode)

n Supported input sources : CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / AUX1 / AUX2 / Media Player / CDz / TV Audioz

zYou can set the picture mode when an HDMI, component video or video connector is assigned and i/p Scaler is set to anything other than Off. (v p. 205)

1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed.

2 Use ui to select Picture Mode, then press ENTER. The Picture Mode screen is displayed.

3 Use o p to select the picture mode.

Off (Default):

No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.

Standard: The standard mode suited for most living room viewing environments.

Movie: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as a theater room.

Vivid: A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter and more vivid.

Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.

ISF Day: A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room during the day.

ISF Night: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at night.

Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually.

4 Press ENTER.

0 Picture Mode settings are stored for each input source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

137Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing the same music in all zones (All Zone Stereo)

You can play back the music being played back in MAIN ZONE simultaneously in ZONE2 and ZONE3 (another rooms). It is useful when you want to enjoy the same music at the same time in multiple rooms during home party or when you want to play back the same background music in the entire house.

1 Press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is HEOS Music, an option menu for

online music is displayed. Select AVR Options, then press ENTER.

2 Use ui to select All Zone Stereo, then press ENTER. The All Zone Stereo screen is displayed.

3 Select Start, then press ENTER. 0 The input sources for ZONE2 and ZONE3 are switched to the

same input source as for MAIN ZONE, and playback starts in the All Zone Stereo mode.

0 When you do not want ZONE2 or ZONE3 to participate in All Zone Stereo, press ENTER to clear the check mark and then press Start.

o Stopping the All Zone Stereo mode

1 During playback in All Zone Stereo mode, press OPTION. An option menu screen is displayed. 0 When the input source is HEOS Music, an option menu for

online music is displayed. Select AVR Options, then press ENTER.

2 Use ui to select All Zone Stereo, then press ENTER.

3 Select Stop, then press ENTER.

0 The All Zone Stereo mode is canceled even when the power supply of the MAIN ZONE is turned off.

0 In the All Zone Stereo mode, only the Multi Ch Stereo and Stereo sound modes can be selected.

0 When HDMI Audio Out is set to TV, the All Zone Stereo mode is not available. (v p. 199)

0 When Input Mode is set to other than 7.1CH IN, the All Zone Stereo mode is available. (v p. 216)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

138Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting a sound mode

.

USB

PUREMOVIE MUSIC GAME

ui

This unit allows you to enjoy various kinds of surround and stereo playback modes. Disc formats such as Blu-ray Disc and DVD, as well as being supported by digital broadcasting, and even by streaming movies and music from internet-based subscription services. This unit supports playback of almost all of these multi-channel audio formats. It also supports surround playback of audio formats other than multi-channel audio such as 2-channel stereo audio.

0 For audio formats recorded on a disc, see the disc jacket or label.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

139Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Selecting a sound mode 1 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to select a sound mode.

MOVIE : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying movies and TV programs.

MUSIC : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying music.

GAME : Switches to the sound mode suitable for enjoying games.

0 The MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME button memorizes the last sound mode selected for its button. Pressing MOVIE, MUSIC, or GAME recalls the same sound mode as the one selected at the previous playback.

0 If the content played back does not support the previously selected sound mode, the most appropriate sound mode for the content is automatically selected.

o Switching the sound mode 0 Press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME to display a list of the sound modes

that can be selected. Each time you press MOVIE, MUSIC or GAME, the sound mode changes.

0 While the list is displayed, you can also use ui to select a sound mode.

0 Try out various sound modes and enjoy sound mode in your favorite mode.

0 Please set the surround mode to Dolby Atmos/Surround when playing back Dolby Atmos encoded content. Dolby Atmos/Surround delivers the optimum playback experience from Blu-ray and streaming sources encoded with Dolby Atmos as well as channel based content. The default setting of this receiver is Dolby Atmos/ Surround.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

140Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

GExampleH When MOVIE is pressed

.

MOVIE SOUND

Stereo Dolby Audio - Dolby Surround

DTS Neural:X Auro-3D

Auro-2D Surround Multi Ch Stereo

This unit provides not only sound modes that conform to the formats recorded on discs such as Dolby and DTS, but also extended types of modes that match your speaker configuration and original sound modes that create atmosphere of Rock Arena and Jazz Club, etc.

Direct playback Sound recorded in source is played as is.

1 Press PURE to select Direct. Direct playback begins.

0 While DSD signals are played back, DSD Direct is displayed.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

141Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Pure Direct playback This mode is for playback with higher sound quality than in Direct playback mode. This mode turns off the main unit display and analog video circuit. Doing so suppresses noise sources that affect sound quality.

1 Press PURE to select Pure Direct. The display goes dark, and Pure Direct playback begins.

0 In Direct and Pure Direct sound modes, the following items cannot be adjusted. 0 Dialog Enhancer (v p. 133) 0 Tone (v p. 135) 0 Restorer (v p. 189) 0 MultEQ XT32 (v p. 192) 0 Dynamic EQ (v p. 193) 0 Dynamic Volume (v p. 194) 0 Graphic EQ (v p. 195)

NOTE 0 Video signals are only output when HDMI signals are played in the Pure Direct

mode. 0 When the Pure Direct mode has been selected, the display turns off after about 5

seconds.

Auto surround playback This mode detects the type of input digital signal, and automatically selects the corresponding mode for playback. Perform stereo playback when the input signal is PCM. When the input signal is Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.

1 Press PURE to select Auto. Auto surround playback begins.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

142Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Description of sound mode types Dolby sound mode

Sound mode type Description Dolby Atmos Please select this mode to play content encoded with Dolby Atmos. If you have selected a different sound mode

previously, please select again this mode for Dolby Atmos content play back. It decodes Dolby Atmos content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use ceiling speakers and/or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field. An immersive audio experience can be enjoyed from traditional speaker layouts that do not employ overhead or Dolby Atmos Enabled Speakers by selecting the Speaker Virtualizer feature.

Dolby TrueHD Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby TrueHD at 192kHz/96kHz. Dolby Digital Plus Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital Plus. Dolby Digital Please select this mode to play back the contents encoded with Dolby Digital. Dolby Surround This mode uses Dolby Surround Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback.

This mode extends the audio to the ceiling and Front Wide speakers in addition to traditional 7.1-channel layout. Use ceiling speakers such as top middle speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

143Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

DTS sound mode Sound mode type Description

DTS Surround This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS. DTS ES Dscrt6.1z1 This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES.

The surround back channel added using the discrete method is played as an independent channel. Since all channels are independent, the 360-degree spacial expressiveness and sound localization are enhanced.

DTS ES Mtrx6.1z1 This mode is suitable for playing discs recorded in DTS-ES. The surround back channel added to the surround-left and surround-right channels by a matrix encoder at software recording time is decoded by this units matrix decoder and played from each channel (surround left, surround right, surround back).

DTS 96/24 This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS 96/24. DTS-HD This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS-HD. DTS Express This mode can be selected when playing sources recorded in DTS Express. DTS:X This mode can be selected when playing back content encoded with DTS:X.

It decodes DTS:X content and its positioning data in real time and outputs audio from the appropriate speakers, creating natural audio images regardless of the speaker layout. Use height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

144Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sound mode type Description IMAX DTS This mode is automatically activated when playing back IMAX Enhanced content featuring a DTS bitstream. (v p. 184)

0 Also this mode is selectable when Surround Parameter - IMAX is set to On in the menu and a 48 kHz sampling frequency DTS 5.1 channel signal is being input.

0 When Speaker Config. - Surr. Back is set to 2 spkrs, Speaker Config. - Center is set to Large or Small, and sound mode is set to IMAX DTS, surround audio is output from the surround back speaker. Audio is not output from the surround speaker.

0 The bass information of speakers are not redirected to the subwoofer, but getting a better bass effect from front and center speakers by special algorithm of IMAX when the Front and Center are set to Small.

IMAX DTS:X This mode is automatically activated when playing back IMAX Enhanced content featuring a DTS:X bitstream. (v p. 184) 0 The bass information of speakers are not redirected to the subwoofer, but getting a better bass effect from front and

center speakers by special algorithm of IMAX when the Front and Center are set to Small. DTS Neural:X This mode uses DTS Neural:X Upmixer to extend various sources to natural and realistic multi channels for playback.

Use height speakers such as front height speakers to realize a three-dimensional sound field. DTS Virtual:Xz2z3 This mode uses DTS Virtual:X with virtual height and virtual surround processing to realize a three-dimensional sound field

when the height speakers are not used. z1 This can be selected when Speaker Config. - Surr. Back is not set to None. (v p. 239) z2 It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos. z3 This can be selected when Height, Ceiling and Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers are not being used.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

145Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Auro-3D sound mode Sound mode type Description

Auro-3D This mode uses an Auro-3D decoder to create three-dimensional audio output using the Height Channel. It is ideal for playback of signals encoded as Auro-3D with a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as Auro-3D are input, an Upmixer called the Auro-Matic is used to create highly realistic three-dimensional audio output.

Auro-2D Surround This mode uses an Auro-3D decoder to create Surround Sound without a Height Channel. It is ideal for playback of signals encoded as Auro-3D without a Height Channel. If signals not encoded as Auro-3D are input, an Upmixer called the Auro- Matic is used to output Surround Sound.

MPEG-H sound mode Sound mode type Description

MPEG-H This mode can be selected when MPEG-H audio is being delivered, such as in TV broadcasts. With MPEG-H, you can enjoy playback of highly realistic sound according to the format it is delivered in, such as music programs with high-quality sound and movies with multi-channel audio.

PCM multi-channel sound mode Sound mode type Description

Multi Ch In This mode can be selected when playing multi-channel PCM/DSD sources.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

146Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Original sound mode Sound mode type Description

Multi Ch Stereo This mode is for enjoying stereo sound from all speakers. Rock Arena This mode simulates the expansive sound of a live concert in an arena. Jazz Club This mode simulates the experience of being in an intimate jazz club. Mono Movie This mode works with monaural audio sources and delivers a surround sound effect. For optimum channel balance and

surround sound effects, connect the monaural source to both of the front (L/R) audio inputs. Video Game This mode provides an exciting, dynamic surround sound effect with your favorite action video games. Matrix This mode adds a spacious surround sound effect with stereo music sources. Virtual This mode lets you experience an expansive surround sound effect when playing back through just the front (L/R)

speakers only, and when listening with stereo headphones.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

147Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Auto sound mode Sound mode type Description

Auto In this mode, the type of digital signal input, such as Dolby Digital, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Atmos, DTS, DTS-HD, DTS:X, DTS-ES, PCM (multi-channel) is detected, and the playback mode switches automatically to the corresponding mode. If the input signal is analog or PCM (2-channel), stereo playback is used. For Dolby Digital or DTS, the music is played back according to the respective channel number.

Stereo sound mode Sound mode type Description

Stereo This mode plays 2-channel stereo audio with no additional surround sound processing. 0 Sound is output from the front left and right speakers, and subwoofer if connected. 0 When multi-channel signals are inputted, they are mixed down to 2-channel audio and are played back with no

additional surround sound processing.

Direct sound mode Sound mode type Description

Direct This mode plays back audio as recorded in the source. Pure Direct This mode plays back an even higher quality sound than the Direct mode.

The following circuits are stopped in order to further improve sound quality. 0 Display indicator circuit of the main body (display will go off.) 0 The analog video input/output switcher and processor is disabled.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

148Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sound mode that can be selected for each input signal 0 The following sound modes can be selected using the MOVIE, MUSIC and GAME buttons. 0 Adjust the sound field effect with the menu Surround Parameter to enjoy surround sound the way you like it. (v p. 181)

.

Stereo S S S Dolby Surround z2 S S S DTS Neural:X z3 S S S DTS Virtual:X z4z5 S S S Auro-3D z6 S S S Auro-2D Surround z7 S S S Multi Ch Stereo S S S Mono Movie S Rock Arena S Jazz Club S Matrix S Video Game S Virtual S S S

2-channel z1

GAME buttonMUSIC buttonMOVIE buttonSound modeInput signal

z1 2-channel also includes analog input. z2 This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1, 7.1, 9.1, 11.1 or 13.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used or when the speaker

configuration is front speakers only. z3 This mode plays back 2-channel sources in 5.1, 7.1, 9.1 or 11.1-channel playback. It cannot be selected when headphones are used or when the speaker configuration is

front speakers only. z4 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used. z5 It cannot be selected when the input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos. z6 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration without front height or front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers is used. z7 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

149Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

Input signal Sound mode MOVIE button MUSIC button GAME button Multi-channel z8 Stereo S S S

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital S S S Dolby Digital + Dolby Surround z9 S S S Dolby Digital + Neural:X z9 S S S

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus S S S Dolby Digital Plus + Dolby Surround z9z10 S S S Dolby Digital Plus + Neural:X z9 S S S Dolby Atmos z9z11 S S S

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD S S S Dolby TrueHD + Dolby Surround z9z10 S S S Dolby TrueHD + Neural:X z9 S S S Dolby Atmos z9z11 S S S

Dolby Atmos Dolby Atmos S S S

z8 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. z9 This cannot be selected when headphones are used. z10 This can be selected when the input signal does not contain Dolby Atmos. z11 This can be selected when the input signal contains Dolby Atmos.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

150Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

Input signal Sound mode MOVIE button MUSIC button GAME button

DTS

DTS Surround S S S DTS ES Dscrt 6.1 z9 S S S DTS ES Mtrx 6.1 z9 S S S DTS 96/24 S S S DTS + Dolby Surround z9 S S S DTS + Neural:X z9 S S S DTS + Virtual:X z4 S S S IMAX DTS z12 S S S IMAX DTS + Neural:X z9z12 S S S IMAX DTS + Virtual:X z4z12 S S S

DTS-HD / DTS Express

DTS-HD HI RES S S S DTS-HD MSTR S S S DTS Express S S S DTS-HD + Dolby Surround z9 S S S DTS-HD + Neural:X z9 S S S DTS-HD + Virtual:X z4 S S S

M ul

ti- ch

an ne

l z 8

z4 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used. z8 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. z9 This cannot be selected when headphones are used. z12 Selectable when Surround Parameter - IMAX is set to On in the menu and a 48 kHz sampling frequency DTS 5.1 channel signal is being input. (v p. 184)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

151Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

Input signal Sound mode MOVIE button MUSIC button GAME button

DTS:X

DTS:X S S S DTS:X MSTR S S S DTS:X + Virtual:X z4 S S S

IMAX DTS

IMAX DTS z9z13 S S S IMAX DTS + Neural:X z9z13 S S S IMAX DTS + Virtual:X z4z13 S S S

IMAX DTS:X IMAX DTS:X z9z13 S S S IMAX DTS:X + Virtual:X z4z13 S S S

MPEG-H MPEG-H S S S

PCM multi-channel

Multi Ch In S S S Multi Ch In 7.1 z9 S S S Multi In + Dolby Surround z9 S S S Multi In + Neural:X z9 S S S Multi In + Virtual:X z4 S S S

M ul

ti- ch

an ne

l z 8

z4 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration with any height speakers is used. z8 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. z9 This cannot be selected when headphones are used. z13 Selectable when Surround Parameter - IMAX is set to Auto in the menu. When IMAX is set to Off, playback is normal DTS or DTS:X. (v p. 184)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

152Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

Input signal Sound mode MOVIE button MUSIC button GAME button

Multi-channel z8

Auro-3D z6z14 S S S Auro-2D Surround z7z14 S S S Multi Ch Stereo S S S Mono Movie z14 S Rock Arena z14 S Jazz Club z14 S Matrix z14 S Video Game z14 S Virtual z14 S S S

z6 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when a speaker configuration without front height or front Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers is used. z7 It cannot be selected when headphones are used, or when only front speakers are used. z8 The sound mode that can be selected differs depending on the audio format of the input signal and the number of channels. z14 It cannot be selected when the input signal is MPEG-H.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

153Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Views on the display

.

q w

A Shows a decoder to be used. 0 In the case of the Dolby Digital Plus decoder, is displayed.

B Shows a decoder that creates sound output. 0 indicates that the Dolby Surround decoder is being used.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

154Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

HDMI Control function A recent addition to the HDMI standard is CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), which allows control signals from one device to communicate with another device via the HDMI cable connection.

Setting procedure 1 Enable the HDMI Control function of this unit.

Set HDMI Control to On. (v p. 201)

2 Turn the power on for all the devices connected by HDMI cable.

3 Set the HDMI Control function for all devices connected by HDMI cable. 0 Please consult the operating instructions for the connected

devices to check the settings. 0 Carry out steps 2 and 3 should any of the devices be unplugged.

4 Switch the television input to the HDMI input connected to this unit.

5 Switch the input source of this unit to check that video from the player connected by HDMI is played back correctly.

6 When you turn the TVs power to standby, check that the power of this unit also goes to standby.

NOTE 0 Some functions may not operate depending on the connected TV or player. Check

the owners manual of each device for details beforehand. 0 The HDMI ZONE2 function is not compatible with the HDMI Control function. 0 When the HDMI ZONE2 function is used with HDMI Control in the menu set to

On, the HDMI ZONE2 function may not fully work.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

155Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Smart Menu function This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an input source and set Internet Radio stations using the TV remote control.

1 Enable the HDMI Control function of this unit and the TV. (v p. 201)

2 Set Smart Menu to On on this unit. (v p. 203)

3 Select AV Receiver in a TV menu such as Inputz or Operate Connected HDMI Devicez. The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV. 0 This unit can be operated with the TV remote control while the

Smart Menu is displayed. zThe selection method differs depending on your TV.

.

Smart Menu

Quick Select 4

Help

Quick Select 3Quick Select 2Quick Select 1

Smart Menu

etupSound ModeSourceNow Playing Blu-ray

o Now Playing Enjoy content from the input source currently selected on this unit.

o Source Switch the input of this unit. If you select HEOS Music, you can continue to operate this unit using the TV remote control.

o Sound Mode Change the sound mode of this unit. You can select from the following three sound modes.

Surround: Surround sound playback according to the input signal.

Stereo: Stereo playback. Multi Ch Stereo: Multi-channel stereo playback.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

156Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Setup Menu Displays a setup menu for configuring the settings of this unit.

o Quick Select Calls up the Quick Select items registered to this unit.

NOTE 0 If the HDMI Control or Smart Menu settings have been changed, always reset

the power to connected devices after the change. 0 The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the specifications

of your TV. In this case, set Smart Menu to Off. (v p. 203)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

157Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sleep timer function

.

USB

SLEEP

ZONE SELECT

You can have the power automatically switched to standby once a set time has elapsed. This is convenient for viewing and listening while going to sleep. The sleep timer function can be set for each zone.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

158Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Using the sleep timer 1 Press ZONE SELECT to select the operating zone with

the remote control. The J, K or L indicator lights.

2 Press SLEEP and display the time you want to set. 0 The B indicator lights up on the display and the sleep timer

starts. 0 You can set the sleep timer in the range from 10 to 120 minutes in

steps of 10 minutes.

o Checking the remaining time Press SLEEP when the sleep timer is in operation. The remaining time appears on the display.

o To cancel the sleep timer Press SLEEP to select Off. The B indicator on the display turns off.

0 The sleep timer setting is canceled when the unit switches to standby mode.

NOTE 0 The sleep timer function cannot turn off the power of devices connected to this

unit. To turn off the power of those connected devices, set up sleep timers on the connected devices themselves.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

159Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Quick select plus function

.

USB

QUICK SELECT 1 4

ZONE SELECT

Settings such as the input source, volume level and sound mode can be registered to the QUICK SELECT 1 - 4 buttons. You can simply press one of the registered QUICK SELECT buttons in subsequent playbacks to switch to the group of saved settings in a batch. By saving frequently used settings at the QUICK SELECT 1 4 buttons, you will always be able to easily call up the same playback environment. The Quick Select Plus function can be memorized for each zone.

0 The QUICK SELECT button on main unit can only be used to operate the MAIN ZONE.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

160Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Calling up the settings 1 Press ZONE SELECT to select the operating zone with

the remote control. The J, K or L indicator lights.

2 Press QUICK SELECT. The Quick Select settings registered to the button you pressed are called up. 0 The default settings for the input source and volume are as shown

below. GMAIN ZONEH / GZONE2H / GZONE3H

Button Input source Volume QUICK SELECT 1 CBL/SAT 40 QUICK SELECT 2 Blu-ray 40 QUICK SELECT 3 Media Player 40 QUICK SELECT 4 HEOS Music 40

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

161Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Changing the settings 1 Set the items below to the settings you want to

register. The following settings from A to I can be memorized for MAIN ZONE, and settings A and B can be memorized for ZONE2 and ZONE3. A Input source (v p. 101) B Volume (v p. 102) C Sound mode (v p. 139) D Audyssey (Audyssey MultEQ XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ,

Audyssey Dynamic Volume, Audyssey LFC) (v p. 192) E Restorer (v p. 189) F Adjusting the volume of each channel to match the input source

(Channel Level Adjust) (v p. 134) G Displaying your desired video during audio playback (Video

Select) (v p. 136) H Adjusting the picture quality for your viewing environment

(Picture Mode) (v p. 137) I HDMI Video Output (v p. 204)

0 Press and hold QUICK SELECT while a radio station is being received is being played back with any of the following sources, the current radio station is memorized. 0 Internet Radio Station

2 Press ZONE SELECT to select the operating zone with the remote control. The J, K or L indicator lights.

3 Press and hold the desired QUICK SELECT until Quickz Memory, Z2 Quickz Memory or Z3 Quickz Memory appears on the display. The current settings will be memorized. z is displayed the number for the QUICK SELECT button you pressed.

o Changing the Quick Select Name The MAIN ZONE Quick Select name displayed on the TV screen or display of this unit can be changed to a different name. For the name change method, see Quick Select Names. (v p. 265)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

162Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Panel lock function To prevent accidental operation of this unit, you can disable operation of the buttons on the front panel.

.

INFO ENTERu

iX STATUS

Disabling all key button operations 1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO

with the unit in standby mode.

2 Use ui to select FP/VOL LOCK On.

3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. All button operations except X are disabled.

Disabling all button operations except VOLUME

1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.

2 Use ui to select FP LOCK On.

3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. All button operations except X and VOLUME are disabled.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

163Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Canceling the Panel lock function 1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO

with the unit in standby mode.

2 Use ui to select FP LOCK zOff. (z The currently set mode.)

3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. The Panel lock function is canceled.

0 Even when the Panel lock function is set, you can operate the unit using the remote control unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

164Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Remote lock function When connecting an IR receiver, enable the Remote lock function. When the function is enabled, you can not perform operations with the remote control unit. By default, this function is disabled.

.

INFO ENTERu

iX STATUS

Disabling the sensor function of the remote control unit

1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO with the unit in standby mode.

2 Use ui to select RC LOCK On.

3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. The infrared light receiving function is disabled.

Enabling the remote sensor function 1 Press X while you press and hold STATUS and INFO

with the unit in standby mode.

2 Use ui to select RC LOCK zOff. (z The currently set mode.)

3 Press ENTER to enter the setting. Infrared light receiving function on the main unit is enabled.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

165Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Web control function You can control this unit from a web control screen on a web browser.

.

Tablet

RouterPC This unit

0 This unit and the PC or tablet need to be connected correctly to the network in order to use the web control function. (v p. 95)

0 Depending on the settings of your security-related software, you may not be able to access this unit from your PC. If this is the case, then change the settings of the security-related software.

Controlling the unit from a web control 1 Switch the Network Control setting to Always On.

(v p. 256)

2 Check the IP address of this unit with Information. (v p. 251)

.

Network/Information Friendly Name DHCP

IP Address MAC Address

Displays the current network settings of the AVR

Denon AVC-X8500H On

192.168.100.19 Connection Wired (Ethernet)

zzzzzz-000000

Checking the IP address.

3 Start up the web browser.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

166Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

4 Enter the IP address of this unit in browsers address box. For example, if the IP address of this unit is 192.168.100.19, enter http://192.168.100.19.

.

http://192.168.100.19 File Edit View Tools HelpFavorites

5 When the top menu is displayed on the web browser, click on the menu item you want to operate.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

167Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3 (Another room) You can operate this unit to enjoy video and audio in a room (ZONE2 and ZONE3) that is different from the room where this unit is placed (MAIN ZONE). You can simultaneously play back the same source in both the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3. You can also play back separate sources in the MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Connecting ZONE You can use the following three methods to play back video and audio in ZONE2 and ZONE3. 0 Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector (v p. 168) 0 Connection through the video output connector and speaker output

connector (v p. 169) 0 Connection through the video output connector and external power

amplifiers (v p. 171)

o Connection 1 : Connection through the HDMI ZONE2 connector

When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, you can play back a video or audio from the device connected to the HDMI 1 6 IN connector in ZONE2 (HDMI ZONE2 function).

.

HDMI ZONE2 HDMI

ZONE2MAIN ZONE This unit

0 When a TV is connected to the HDMI ZONE2 OUT connector, and the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source, the MAIN ZONE audio may be mixed down to 2-channel audio.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

168Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Connection 2 : Connection through the video output connector and speaker output connector When Assign Mode in the menu is set to any of the following audio is output from speakers in ZONE2 or ZONE3. (v p. 228)

n Assign Mode: 11.1ch + ZONE2

.

IN VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y PB PR

IN

w q w q

(L) (R)

ZONE2

or

This unit MAIN ZONE

z1

n Assign Mode: 11.1ch + ZONE3

.

IN VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y PB PR

IN

w q w q

(L) (R)

z1

z2

ZONE3

or

This unit MAIN ZONE

z1 Set ZONE2 or ZONE3 for Analog Video Out - Component in the menu to enable use of the MAIN ZONE component video output terminal for ZONE2 or ZONE3. (v p. 208)

z2 Set ZONE3 for Analog Video Out - Video in the menu to enable use of the MAIN ZONE video output terminal for ZONE3. (v p. 208)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

169Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n Assign Mode: 11.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO

.

IN VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y PB PR

IN IN VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y PB PR

IN

w q w q

z1 z2

ZONE3ZONE2

or

This unit MAIN ZONE

or

z1 Set ZONE2 or ZONE3 for Analog Video Out - Component in the menu to enable use of the MAIN ZONE component video output terminal for ZONE2 or ZONE3. (v p. 208)

z2 Set ZONE3 for Analog Video Out - Video in the menu to enable use of the MAIN ZONE video output terminal for ZONE3. (v p. 208)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

170Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Connection 3 : Connection through the video output connector and external power amplifiers The audio signals of this units ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output connectors are played on the ZONE2 and ZONE3 power amplifiers.

.

R L R L

IN VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y PB PR

IN IN VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

Y PB PR

IN

AUX IN AUX IN

Power amplifier Power amplifier

z1

z2

ZONE3ZONE2

or

This unit

MAIN ZONE

or

z1 Set ZONE2 or ZONE3 for Analog Video Out - Component in the menu to enable use of the MAIN ZONE component video output terminal for ZONE2 or ZONE3. (v p. 208)

z2 Set ZONE3 for Analog Video Out - Video in the menu to enable use of the MAIN ZONE video output terminal for ZONE3. (v p. 208)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

171Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from HDMI connector or digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE2. 0 If you want to play back HDMI signals other than 2-channel PCM in ZONE2, set HDMI Audio to PCM. (v p. 264)

2-channel PCM signals are output from a device connected to the input source selected for ZONE2 and can be played back in ZONE2. In this case, the MAIN ZONE audio will also be converted to 2-channel PCM signals if the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 are set to the same input source. However, depending on the playback device, the playback signal may not be converted to PCM even if this setting is configured.

0 The analog audio signal and the 2-channel PCM signal input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) can be played back in ZONE3. 0 The menu screen is not output in ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

172Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playback in ZONE2/ZONE3

.

USB

VOLUME df

POWER X

MUTE :

ZONE SELECT

Input source select buttons

1 Press ZONE SELECT to switch the zone mode. The K or L indicator lights.

2 Press POWER X to turn on the ZONE2 or ZONE3 power. The j indicator on the display lights. 0 Power in ZONE2 or ZONE3 can be turned on or off by pressing

ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF on the main unit.

3 Press the input source select button to select the input source to be played. The audio signal of the selected source is output to ZONE2 or ZONE3. 0 To perform an operation with the main unit, press ZONE2

SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE. Each time you press ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE, the input source changes.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

173Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Adjusting the volume (ZONE2/ZONE3) Use VOLUME df to adjust the volume. 0 At time of purchase, Volume Limit is set to 70 (10 dB).

(v p. 264)

0 Turn MASTER VOLUME after pressing ZONE2 SOURCE or ZONE3 SOURCE on the main unit to adjust the volume.

o Turning off the sound temporarily (Muting) (ZONE2/ZONE3)

Press MUTE :. The sound is reduced to the level set at Mute Level in the menu. (v p. 265) 0 To cancel mute, either adjust the sound volume or press MUTE :

again.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

174Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Menu map When using menu operations, connect this unit to a TV and operate this unit while viewing the TV. The recommended settings are configured for this unit by default. You can customize this unit based on your existing system and your preferences.

Setting items Detailed items Description Page

.

Audio

Subwoofer Level Adjust Adjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources. 180 Bass Sync Adjusts the phase shift when there is a delay in the bass (LFE) recorded on a disc. 180 Surround Parameter Adjusts surround sound parameters. 181 Restorer Expands the low and high frequency components of compressed audio content such as

MP3 files to enable richer audio playback. 189

Audio Delay Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio. 190 Volume Sets the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting. 191 Audyssey Makes Audyssey MultEQ XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ, Audyssey Dynamic

Volume and Audyssey LFCTM settings. 192

Graphic EQ Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker. 195

.

Video

Picture Adjust Adjusts picture quality. 197 HDMI Setup Makes settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings. 199 Output Settings Makes settings for video output. 204 Analog Video Out Selects the zone that uses component video output and video output. 208 On Screen Display Configures the on-screen display settings. 208 4K/8K Signal Format Sets signal format options for your 4K or 8K video equipment. 209 TV Format Sets the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using. 211

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

175Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting items Detailed items Description Page

.

Inputs

Input Assign Changes input connector assignment. 212 Source Rename Changes the display name for input source. 214 Hide Sources Removes from the display input sources that are not used. 215 Source Level Adjusts the playback level of the audio input. 215 Input Select Sets the audio input mode. 216

.

Speakers

Audyssey Setup The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically.

217

Manual Setup Sets up the speakers manually or changes Audyssey Setup settings. 228

.

Network

Information Displays network information. 251 Connection Selects whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. 251 Settings Used for manually setting the IP address. 254 Network Control Enables network communication in standby power mode. 256 Friendly Name The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change

the Friendly Name according to your preferences. 256

Diagnostics Used to check the network connection. 257

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

176Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting items Detailed items Description Page

.

HEOS Account

When the user is signed out the HEOS Account I have a HEOS Account Selects to sign in. 258 Create Account Creates new HEOS Account. 258 Forgot Password If you forgot your password, we'll send you an email with instructions about how to reset

it. 258

When the user is signed in the HEOS Account Signed in As Displays your HEOS Account. 258 Change Location Selects your location. 258 Change Password Changes your HEOS Account Password. 258 Delete Account Deletes your HEOS Account. 258 Sign Out Sign out of your HEOS Account. 258

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

177Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting items Detailed items Description Page

.

General

Language Changes the language of the display on the TV screen. 259 ECO Configures the ECO Mode and Auto Standby energy-saving functions. 259 ZONE2 Setup/ ZONE3 Setup

Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3. 263

Zone Rename Changes the display title of each zone to one you prefer. 265 Quick Select Names Changes the Quick Select Name display title to one you prefer. 265 Trigger Out 1/ Trigger Out 2

Select the conditions for activating trigger out function. 266

Front Display Makes settings related to the display on this unit. 266 Firmware Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the

firmware, and sets up the notification message display. 267

Information Shows information about this unit settings, input signals, etc. 270 Remote ID Sets the ID of the remote control code to which this unit responds. 272 Usage Data Selects whether or not to send anonymous usage data to Denon. 272 Save & Load Save and restore device settings by using a USB memory device. 273 Setup Lock Protects settings from inadvertent changes. 273

.

Setup Assistant

Begin Setup... Performs basic installation/connections/settings from the beginning according to the guidance indicated on the TV screen.

Page 9 of the separate manual Quick Start Guide

Language Select Sets individual setting items according to the guidance displayed on the TV screen. Speaker Setup Speaker Calibration Network Setup TV Audio Connection Input Setup Mobile Apps

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

178Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

USB

SETUP uio p ENTER

ZONE SELECT

BACK

Menu operations 1 Press ZONE SELECT on the remote control unit to set

the operating zone to the MAIN ZONE. The J indicator lights.

2 Press SETUP. The menu is displayed on the TV screen.

3 Use uip to select the menu to be set or operated, then press ENTER.

4 Use op to change to desired setting.

5 Press ENTER to enter the setting. 0 To return to the previous item, press BACK. 0 Exiting the menu, press SETUP while the menu is displayed. The

menu display disappears.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

179Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audio Make audio-related settings.

Subwoofer Level Adjust Adjusts the subwoofer channel volume for all input sources.

o Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2 Adjusts the volume level for the Subwoofer 1 and Subwoofer 2. 12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

0 This setting is also reflected in the subwoofer channel level in the Speakers - Levels menu settings. (v p. 245)

Bass Sync For contents recorded in multi-channel such as Blu-ray discs, the recorded low frequency effects (LFE) may be out of synch and delayed. This function corrects such a delay of low frequency effects (LFE).

0 ms 16 ms (Default : 0 ms)

0 How low frequency effects (LFE) are delayed differ according to the disc. Set this to the desired value.

0 Bass Sync settings are stored for each input source. 0 This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal. 0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to 7.1CH IN.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

180Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Surround Parameter You can adjust the surround audio sound field effects to match your preferences. The items (parameters) that can be adjusted depend on the signal being input and the currently set sound mode.

0 Some setting items cannot be set while playback is stopped. Make the settings during playback.

0 Surround Parameter settings are stored for each sound mode.

o Cinema EQ Gently softens the upper treble range of movie soundtracks to reduce possible harshness and improve clarity. On: Cinema EQ is used. Off (Default): Cinema EQ is not used.

0 This item cannot be set when sound mode is Direct, Pure Direct, Stereo and Original sound mode.

o Loudness Management This sets whether to output as specified in Dynamic Compression or output directly without compressing the dynamic range of audio recorded in the disc.

On (Default):

Outputs are given based on enabling the settings made in Dynamic Compression and Dialogue normalization function.

Off: Dynamic Compression settings and Dialogue normalization are disabled, and the signals on the disc are output as is.

0 Loudness Management can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and Dolby Atmos signal is input.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

181Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Dynamic Compression Compress dynamic range (difference between loud and soft sounds).

Auto: Automatic dynamic range compression on/off control according to source.

Low / Medium / High: These set the compression level. Off: Dynamic range compression is always

off.

0 Dynamic Compression can be set when Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos or DTS signal is input.

0 The default setting is Off. When the input signal is the Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Atmos source, the default setting is Auto.

0 Auto cannot be set when inputting a DTS signal.

o Dialog Control Adjust the volume of dialog in movies, vocals in music, etc. so these can be heard more easily. 0 6 (Default : 0)

0 This can be set when a DTS:X signal that is compatible with the Dialog Control function is input.

o Low Frequency Effects Adjust the low frequency effects level (LFE).

n When Input Mode is set other than to 7.1CH IN -10 dB 0 dB (Default: 0 dB)

n When Input Mode is set to 7.1CH IN 0 dB / +5 dB / +10 dB / +15 dB (Default: +15 dB)

0 This can be set when the LFE signal is included in the input signal. 0 This item can be selected when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal or DVD-Audio is

played. 0 For proper playback of the different sources, we recommend setting to the

values below. 0 Dolby Digital sources: 0 dB 0 DTS movie sources: 0 dB 0 DTS music sources: -10 dB

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

182Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Center Spread Center Spread expands the center channel signal to left and right front speakers to create a wider frontal audio image for the listener. It is optimized and designed primary for playback of stereo music content. On: Use Center Spread. Off (Default): Do not use Center Spread.

0 You can set this when sound mode is Dolby Surround.

o Speaker Virtualizer The Speaker Virtualizer enhances the surround and height speaker channels to create an enveloping virtual surround effect. On (Default): Enables Speaker Virtualizer. Off: Disables Speaker Virtualizer.

0 You can set this when the sound mode is Dolby Atmos, Dolby Surround or sound mode that has +Dolby Surround in the sound mode name.

0 Usable when not using height, ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers, or when not using surround speakers.

0 Audio is not output from the surround back speaker if Speaker Virtualizer is set to On when Speaker Config. - Surr. Back is set to 1 spkr in the menu.

0 Audio is not output from the front wide speaker if Speaker Virtualizer is set to On.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

183Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o DTS Neural:X DTS Neural:X Expands the non-object based audio signals and optimizes them for your speaker configuration. On (Default): Use DTS Neural:X. Off: Do not use DTS Neural:X.

0 You can set this when sound mode is DTS:X or DTS:X MSTR.

o IMAX Sets the audio mode for IMAX playback. Auto (Default):

Automatically enables the IMAX mode when IMAX content is detected.

On: Enables IMAX settings for IMAX streaming content when automatic detection is not possible.

Off: Disables the IMAX mode.

0 In case of streaming the IMAX contents from online streaming service using TV Apps or player Apps (such as Blu-ray players App), this unit may not detect the signal as IMAX contents automatically. In this case, you can enable IMAX mode by setting this parameter to On manually.

0 This setting can only be turned On when DTS 5.1 channel content recorded as IMAX DTS is input.

0 This setting cannot be set when headphones are used.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

184Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o IMAX Audio Settings You can configure special IMAX audio settings to recreate the conditions of an IMAX theater.

Auto (Default):

Applies the optimized speaker settings to reproduce similar to the IMAX theater environment.

Manual: Manually adjusts the High Pass Filter, Low Pass Filter and Subwoofer Mode.

0 You can set this when sound mode is IMAX DTS or IMAX DTS:X. 0 Speakers - Crossovers, Bass - Subwoofer Mode and LPF for LFE in

the menu cannot be applied during IMAX playback.

o High Pass Filter Set the high pass filter cutoff frequency for all speakers during IMAX playback. 40 Hz / 60 Hz / 70 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)

0 You can set this when IMAX Audio Settings is set to Manual.

o Low Pass Filter Set the low pass filter cutoff frequency of the LFE signal during IMAX playback. 70 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 120 Hz)

0 You can set this when IMAX Audio Settings is set to Manual.

o Subwoofer Mode Set the bass signal to be played by the subwoofer during IMAX playback.

On: The low range signal of all speakers is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer. The LFE signal and the bass component of each speaker is played.

Off (Default): Only the LFE signal is played.

0 You can set this when IMAX Audio Settings is set to Manual.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

185Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Auro-Matic 3D Preset Selects the Auro-Matic 3D Preset for fine tuning the Auro-3D experience to specific audio material.

Small: Small is ideal for pop and chamber music.

Medium (Default):

Medium is best used on jazz music or typical movies and TV shows.

Large: Large is ideal for recordings that were recorded in large spaces (e.g. orchestral recording).

Movie: Movie is ideal for experiencing a large- cinema effect for watching movies (e.g. action movies with big explosions).

Speech: Speech is ideal for recordings which are mostly dialog (e.g. news broadcast), and that have virtually no inherent spatial information.

0 You can set this when the sound mode is set to Auro-3D. 0 This cannot be set if the input signal contains Auro-3D signals containing a

Height channel.

o Auro-Matic 3D Strength Changes the level of the up-mixed channels in relation to the original input signal. The value ranges from 1 (no up-mixing) to 16 (Maximum level, providing maximum effect).

1 - 16 (Default:10)

0 You can set this when the sound mode is set to Auro-3D. 0 This cannot be set if the input signal contains Auro-3D signals containing a

Height channel.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

186Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Auro-3D Mode Select how to output sound to all speakers when Auro-3D decoding is active.

Channel Expansion (Default):

Incoming Auro-3D content is expanded to additional speakers. All speakers configured for Auro-3D will output sound.

Direct: Incoming Auro-3D content is sent directly to each corresponding channel. No content is sent to additional speakers.

0 You can set this when the input signal contains Auro-3D signal and sound mode is set to Auro-3D.

o Delay Time Adjust the audio delay time against video to extend the sound field image. 0 ms 300 ms (Default: 30 ms)

0 You can set this when the sound mode is Matrix.

o Effect Level Adjust the sound effect level of the current sound mode. 1 15 (Default: 10)

0 This item can be set when sound mode is Rock Arena, Jazz Club, Mono Movie and Video Game.

0 Set to a lower level if the positioning and sense of phase of the surround signals seems unnatural.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

187Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Room Size Determine size of acoustic environment. Small: Simulate acoustics of a small room. Medium small: Simulate acoustics of a medium-small

room. Medium (Default): Simulate acoustics of a medium room.

Medium large: Simulate acoustics of a medium-large room.

Large: Simulate acoustics of a large room.

0 This item can be set when sound mode is Rock Arena, Jazz Club, Mono Movie and Video Game.

0 Room Size does not indicate the size of the room in which sources are played.

o Speaker Select Makes settings for the speakers outputting sound. Floor: Plays back without height speakers. Floor & Height (Default): Plays back with height speakers.

0 This can be set when the sound mode is the original sound mode.

o Subwoofer Turn subwoofer output on and off. On (Default): The subwoofer is used. Off: The subwoofer is not used.

0 You can set this when the sound mode is Direct or Stereo and in the menu Subwoofer Mode is set to LFE+Main. (v p. 247)

o Set Defaults The Surround Parameter settings are returned to the default settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

188Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Restorer Compressed audio formats such as MP3, WMA (Windows Media Audio) and MPEG-4 AAC reduce the amount of data by eliminating signal components that are hard for the human ear to hear. The Restorer function generates the signals eliminated upon compression, restoring the sound to conditions near those of the original sound before compression. It also restores the original bass characteristics for a rich and expanded tonal range.

o Mode

High: Optimized mode for compressed sources with very weak highs (64 kbps and under).

Medium: Apply suitable bass and treble boost for all compressed sources (96 kbps and under).

Low: Optimized mode for compressed sources with normal highs (96 kbps and over).

Off: Do not use Restorer.

0 This item can be set with analog signals or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input.

0 This item default setting for HEOS Music is Low. All others are set to Off. 0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to Direct or Pure Direct. 0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to 7.1CH IN. 0 Restorer settings are stored for each input source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

189Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audio Delay Compensates for incorrect timing between video and audio.

0 Audio Delay for game mode can be set when Video Mode is set to Auto or Game. (v p. 205)

0 Audio Delay settings are stored for each input source. 0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to 7.1CH IN.

o Auto Lip Sync Automatically adjusts the audio processing time to compensate for delays in audio/video timing from TV compatible with Auto Lip Sync. On (Default): Correct automatically. Off: Do not correct automatically.

0 Automatic correction may not be performed depending on the specifications of your TV even when Auto Lip Sync is set to On.

o Adjust The timing mismatch between the picture and sound needs to be corrected manually. 0 ms 500 ms (Default : 0 ms)

0 You can also finely adjust the delay correction value set by Auto Lip Sync. 0 Adjust for game mode can be set when Video Mode is set to Auto or

Game. (v p. 205)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

190Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Volume Set the MAIN ZONE (room where the unit is located) volume setting.

o Scale Set how volume is displayed. 0 - 98 (Default): Display in the range 0 (Min) to 98.

-79.5 dB - 18.0 dB: Display ---dB (Min), in the range 79.5 dB to 18.0 dB.

0 Scale settings are reflected in all the zones.

o Limit Make a setting for maximum volume. 60 (20 dB) / 70 (10 dB) / 80 (0 dB) Off (Default)

0 The dB value is displayed when the Scale setting is -79.5 dB - 18.0 dB. (v p. 191)

o Power On Level Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on. Last (Default):

Use the memorized setting from the last session.

Mute: Always use the muting on condition when power is turned on.

1 98 (79 dB 18 dB) : The volume is adjusted to the set level.

0 The dB value is displayed when the Scale setting is -79.5 dB - 18.0 dB. (v p. 191)

o Mute Level Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on. Full (Default): The sound is muted entirely. 40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down. 20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

191Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audyssey

Set Audyssey MultEQ XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ, Audyssey Dynamic Volume and Audyssey LFC. These can be selected after Audyssey Setup has been performed. For additional information on Audyssey technology, please see Explanation of terms (v p. 327).

0 MultEQ XT32, Dynamic EQ, Reference Level Offset, Dynamic Volume, Audyssey LFC and Containment Amount settings are stored for each input source.

0 When the sound mode is in the Direct or Pure Direct mode, MultEQ XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic Volume and Audyssey LFC settings cannot be configured.

0 When the sound mode is in DTS Virtual:X or sound mode that have +Virtual:X in the sound mode name, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic Volume and Audyssey LFC settings cannot be configured.

0 This item cannot be selected when a DTS:X format with a sampling frequency of over 48 kHz is input.

0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to 7.1CH IN.

o MultEQ XT32 MultEQ XT32 compensates for both time and frequency characteristics of the listening area based on Audyssey Setup measurement results. Selection is done from three types of compensation curves. We recommend the Reference setting.

Reference (Default):

Selects the default calibrated setting with a slight roll off at high frequencies, which is optimized for movies.

L/R Bypass: Selects the reference setting, but bypasses MultEQ XT32 on the front left and right speakers.

Flat: Selects the calibrated setting which is optimized for small rooms where your listening position is closer to the speakers.

Off: Do not use MultEQ XT32.

0 When using headphones, MultEQ XT32 is automatically set to Off.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

192Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Dynamic EQ Solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Works with MultEQ XT32. On (Default): Use Dynamic EQ. Off: Do not use Dynamic EQ.

0 When the menu Dynamic EQ setting is On, it is not possible to do Tone adjustment. (v p. 135)

0 This item cannot be set when MultEQ XT32 in the menu is set to Off.

o Reference Level Offset Audyssey Dynamic EQ is referenced to the standard film mix level. It makes adjustments to maintain the reference response and surround envelopment when the volume is turned down from 0 dB. However, film reference level is not always used in music or other non-film content. Dynamic EQ Reference Level Offset provides three offsets from the film level reference (5 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB) that can be selected when the mix level of the content is not within the standard. Recommended setting levels for content are shown below. 0 dB (Film Reference) (Default): Optimized for content such as movies.

5 dB : Select this setting for content that has a very wide dynamic range, such as classical music.

10 dB : Select this setting for jazz or other music that has a wider dynamic range. This setting should also be selected for TV content as that is usually mixed at 10 dB below film reference.

15 dB : Select this setting for pop/rock music or other program material that is mixed at very high listening levels and has a compressed dynamic range.

0 Setting is enabled when Dynamic EQ is On. (v p. 193)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

193Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Dynamic Volume Solves the problem of large variations in volume level between TV, movies and other content (between quiet passages and loud passages, etc.) by automatically adjusting to the users preferred volume setting. Works with MultEQ XT32.

Heavy: Most adjustment to softest and loudest sounds.

Medium: Medium adjustment to loudest and softest sound.

Light: Least adjustment to loudest and softest sounds.

Off (Default): Do not use Dynamic Volume.

0 If Dynamic Volume is set to Yes in Audyssey Setup, the setting is automatically changed to Medium. (v p. 217)

0 This item cannot be set when MultEQ XT32 in the menu is set to Off.

o Audyssey LFC Adjusts the low frequency band to prevent bass and vibration from being conveyed to neighboring rooms. Works with MultEQ XT32. On: Use Audyssey LFC. Off (Default): Do not use Audyssey LFC.

0 This item cannot be set when MultEQ XT32 in the menu is set to Off.

o Containment Amount Adjusts the amount of low frequency containment. Use higher settings if you have close neighbors. 1 7 (Default : 4)

0 This can be set when Audyssey LFC in the menu is set to On.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

194Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Graphic EQ Uses the graphic equalizer to adjust the tone of each speaker.

0 Speakers for which Graphic EQ can be set differ according to the sound mode. 0 This can be set when MultEQ XT32 setting is Off. (v p. 192) 0 This cannot be set when the sound mode is set to Direct or Pure Direct. 0 If you are using headphones, you can set the equalizer for headphones.

(v p. 195) 0 This cannot be set when the input mode is set to 7.1CH IN.

o Graphic EQ / Headphone EQ Set whether to use the graphic equalizer or not. On: Use the graphic equalizer. Off (Default): Do not use the graphic equalizer.

0 Headphone EQ is set in the menu when headphones are used.

o Speaker Selection Select whether to adjust tones for individual speakers or for all speakers. All: Adjust all speaker tones together. Left/Right (Default):

Adjust the left and right speaker tones together.

Each: Adjust the tone for each speaker.

o Adjust EQ Adjust tonal balance for each frequency band. 1. Select the speaker. 2. Select the adjustment frequency band.

63 Hz / 125 Hz / 250 Hz / 500 Hz / 1 kHz / 2 kHz / 4 kHz / 8 kHz / 16 kHz

3. Adjust the level. 20.0 dB +6.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

0 Front Dolby, Surround Dolby and Back Dolby speakers can only be set when 63 Hz/125 Hz/250 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

195Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Curve Copy Copy the Flat correction curve created in Audyssey Setup.

0 Curve Copy is displayed after Audyssey Setup has been performed. 0 Curve Copy cannot be used when using headphones.

o Set Defaults The Graphic EQ settings are returned to the default settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

196Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Video Make video-related settings.

Picture Adjust Picture quality can be adjusted.

0 This can be set when the Video Conversion setting is On. (v p. 205) 0 This can be set when HDMI, COMP or VIDEO is assigned for each input

source. (v p. 213) 0 Contrast, Brightness, Saturation, Noise Reduction and Enhancer can be

set when Picture Mode is set to Custom. (v p. 197) 0 Picture Adjust settings are stored for each input source. 0 Picture Adjust cannot be set when 4K or 8K signals are input. 0 Picture Adjust cannot be set when sound mode is set to IMAX DTS or IMAX

DTS:X.

o Picture Mode Select the desired picture mode according to the video content and your viewing environment.

Standard: The standard mode suited for most living room viewing environments.

Movie: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room such as a theater room.

Vivid: A mode that makes graphic images for games, etc. brighter and more vivid.

Streaming: A mode suited for low bit rate video sources.

ISF Day: A mode suited for watching movies in a bright room during the day.

ISF Night: A mode suited for watching movies in a dark room at night.

Custom: Adjusts the picture quality manually. Off (Default):

No picture quality adjustment is done with this unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

197Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 The two special adjustment modes, ISF Day and ISF Night, should be used by a certified technician to adjust the color calibration to match the installation conditions. We recommend that the settings and adjustments be carried out by an ISF- certified technician.

0 These settings can also be configured using Picture Mode in the option menu. (v p. 197)

o Contrast Adjust picture contrast. -50 +50 (Default : 0)

o Brightness Adjust picture brightness. -50 +50 (Default : 0)

o Saturation Adjust picture chroma level (color saturation). -50 +50 (Default : 0)

o Noise Reduction Reduce overall video noise. Low / Medium / High / Off (Default : Off)

o Enhancer Emphasize picture sharpness. 0 +12 (Default : 0)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

198Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

HDMI Setup Make settings for HDMI Audio Out, HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control settings.

NOTE 0 When HDMI Pass Through and HDMI Control is set to On, it consumes more

standby power. (HDMI Pass Through (v p. 199), HDMI Control (v p. 201)) If you are not using this unit for an extended period, it is recommended that you unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

o HDMI Audio Out Select HDMI audio output device. AVR (Default):

Play back through speakers connected to the unit.

TV: Play back through TV connected to the unit.

0 When the HDMI Control function is activated, priority is given to the TV audio setting. (v p. 155)

0 When the power of this unit is on and HDMI Audio Out is set to TV, audio is output as 2-channel from the HDMI OUT connector.

o Vertical Stretch Sets whether video signals are vertically stretched or not. On: Stretches video signals vertically. Off (Default): Does not stretch video signals vertically.

0 Vertical Stretch can be set when i/p Scaler is set to anything other than Off. (v p. 205)

o HDMI Pass Through Selects how this unit will transmit HDMI signals to the HDMI output in standby power mode.

On: Transmits the selected HDMI input through this units HDMI output when this unit is in standby power mode.

Off (Default):

No HDMI signals are transmitted through this units HDMI output in standby power mode.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

199Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Pass Through Source Sets the HDMI connector that inputs HDMI signals when in standby. Last (Default):

The most recently used input source will go into standby mode.

CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / Media Player / AUX1 / AUX2/ CDz:

Pass through the selected input source.

zPass Through Source can be set when any of the HDMI connectors is assigned to CD for the input source in the Input Assign setting. (v p. 212)

0 Pass Through Source can be set when HDMI Control is set to On or HDMI Pass Through is set to On. (HDMI Pass Through (v p. 199), HDMI Control (v p. 201))

o RC Source Select Set whether to allow this unit to be turned on by the input source select button on the remote control when this unit is on standby. Power On + Source (Default):

The power of this unit is turned on and the input source changes.

Source Select Only:

The HDMI input source changes while this unit is on standby. The power display of this unit blinks when the input source select button of the remote control is pressed.

0 RC Source Select can be set when HDMI Control is set to On or HDMI Pass Through is set to On. (HDMI Pass Through (v p. 199), HDMI Control (v p. 201))

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

200Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o HDMI Control You can link operations with devices connected to HDMI and compatible with HDMI Control. On: Use HDMI Control function. Off (Default): Do not use HDMI Control function.

0 If using the HDMI Control function, connect a TV compatible with HDMI control to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector.

0 Please consult the operating instructions for each connected device to check the settings.

0 Refer to HDMI Control function for more information about the HDMI Control function. (v p. 155)

NOTE 0 If the HDMI Control settings have been changed, always reset the power to

connected devices after the change.

o ARC On the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector, set whether to receive sound from the TV via HDMI. On: Use ARC function. Off (Default): Do not use ARC function.

0 You can adjust the volume of this unit using the TV remote control. 0 If using this function, use a TV compatible with ARC (Audio Return Channel)

and enable the HDMI Control function of the TV. 0 When HDMI Control is set to On, the ARC settings automatically switch

On. (v p. 201)

NOTE 0 If the ARC settings have been changed, always reset the power to

connected devices after the change. 0 Using an eARC function-compatible television enables audio playback from

the speaker connected to this unit, regardless of ARC settings in the menu.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

201Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o TV Audio Switching Sets automatic switching to the TV Audio input when a TV connected via HDMI sends an appropriate CEC control command to this unit. On (Default):

Select the TV Audio input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.

Off: Do not select the TV Audio input automatically when receiving a command from the TV.

0 TV Audio Switching can be set when HDMI Control is set to On. (v p. 201)

o Power Off Control Links the power standby of this unit to external devices.

All (Default):

If power to a connected TV is turned off independently of the input source, power to this unit is automatically set to standby.

Video: With an input source being selected that is assigned either HDMI, COMP or VIDEO, when you turn the power of the TV off, power to this unit is automatically set to standby. (v p. 213)

Off: This unit does not link with power to a TV.

0 Power Off Control can be set when HDMI Control is set to On. (v p. 201)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

202Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Power Saving If TV Speaker is set as the audio output setting of your TV, this unit is automatically set to standby mode to reduce power consumption. This function is activated in the following cases. 0 When TV Audio is selected as the input source of this unit 0 When playing content from a device connected by HDMI On: Use Power Saving function. Off (Default): Do not use Power Saving function.

0 Power Saving can be set when HDMI Control is set to On. (v p. 201)

o Smart Menu This function can be used to configure the settings of this unit, select an input source and set Internet Radio stations using the TV remote control. On: Use Smart Menu function. Off: Do not use Smart Menu function.

0 Smart Menu can be set when HDMI Control is set to On. (v p. 201)

NOTE 0 If the Smart Menu settings have been changed, always reset the power to

connected devices after the change. 0 The Smart Menu function may not work properly depending on the

specifications of your TV. In this case, set Smart Menu to Off.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

203Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Output Settings Makes settings for video output.

0 This can be set when HDMI, COMP or VIDEO is assigned for each input source. (v p. 213)

0 Resolution, Sharpness, Progressive Mode and Aspect Ratio can be set when i/p Scaler is set to anything other than Off. (Resolution (v p. 206), Sharpness (v p. 206), Progressive Mode (v p. 207), Aspect Ratio (v p. 207))

0 Output Settings cannot be set when 4K or 8K signals are input. 0 Video Mode, i/p Scaler, Resolution, Sharpness, Progressive Mode and

Aspect Ratio cannot be set when sound mode is set to IMAX DTS or IMAX DTS:X. (Video Mode (v p. 205), i/p Scaler (v p. 205), Resolution (v p. 206), Sharpness (v p. 206), Progressive Mode (v p. 207), Aspect Ratio (v p. 207))

0 Video Conversion, Video Mode, i/p Scaler, Resolution, Sharpness, Progressive Mode and Aspect Ratio settings are stored for each input source. (Video Conversion (v p. 205), Video Mode (v p. 205), i/p Scaler (v p. 205), Resolution (v p. 206), Sharpness (v p. 206), Progressive Mode (v p. 207), Aspect Ratio (v p. 207))

o HDMI Video Output Select the HDMI monitor connector to be used.

Auto(Dual) (Default):

The presence of a TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 or HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is detected automatically, and that TV connection is used.

Monitor 1: A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector is always used.

Monitor 2: A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is always used.

0 If both the HDMI MONITOR 1 and HDMI MONITOR 2 connectors are connected and Resolution is set to Auto, the signals are output with a resolution that is compatible with both TVs. (v p. 206) When the Resolution setting in the menu is not set to Auto, set the resolution in Video - HDMI Monitor 1 and HDMI Monitor 2 to one that is compatible with both TVs. (v p. 270)

0 You can check which resolutions are compatible with your TV in HDMI Monitor 1 and HDMI Monitor 2. (v p. 270)

0 When connecting multiple Dolby Vision TVs, the signal will only be optimal for one TV. A TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector has priority.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

204Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Video Mode Configure the video processing method to match the type of video content. Auto (Default):

Process video automatically based on the HDMI content information.

Game:

Always process video for game content. Minimize the video delay when the video is delayed compared to the button operations on the controller of the game console.

Movie: Perform image processing that is suitable for contents other than games.

0 If Video Mode is set to Auto, the mode is switched according to the input contents.

o Video Conversion The input video signal is converted automatically in conjunction with the connected TV. (v p. 321) On (Default): The input video signal is converted. Off: The input video signal is not converted.

o i/p Scaler Set the video input signal to be subjected to i/p Scaler processing. i/p Scaler will convert the resolution of the input video signal to the value set in Resolution. (v p. 206) Analog (Default):

Use i/p (interlace-to-progressive) scaler function for analog video signals.

Analog & HDMI: Use i/p Scaler function for analog and HDMI video signal.

HDMI: Use i/p Scaler function for HDMI video signals.

Off: Do not use i/p Scaler function.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

205Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Resolution Set the output resolution. You can set Resolution separately for HDMI output of the analog video input and HDMI input.

Auto (Default):

The resolution supported by the TV connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT connector is detected automatically and the appropriate output resolution is set.

480p/576p / 1080i / 720p / 1080p / 4K / 8K :

Set the output resolution.

0 When i/p Scaler is set to Analog & HDMI, the resolution of both the analog video input signal and HDMI input signal can be set. (v p. 205)

0 For the detail of upscaling, please refer to Video conversion function (v p. 322).

o Sharpness Enables the sharpness feature which enhances the edges of images when up-scaling video to 4K or 8K.

On:

Enables the video enhancer sharpness feature to provide image edge contouring which is optimized for converting lower resolution standard definition video to 4K or 8K.

Off (Default):

Disables the video enhancer sharpness feature.

0 This item can be set when i/p Scaler is set to anything other than Off. (v p. 205)

0 We recommend using this sharpness feature only when your TV sharpness is set to 0.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

206Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Progressive Mode Set an appropriate progressive conversion mode for the source video signal.

Auto (Default):

The video signal is automatically detected and the appropriate mode is set.

Video: Select mode suitable for video playback. Video and Film: Select mode suitable for video and 30-

frame film material playback.

0 This item can be set when i/p Scaler is set to anything other than Off. (v p. 205)

o Aspect Ratio Set the aspect ratio for the video signals output to the HDMI. 16:9 (Default): Output at 16:9 aspect ratio.

4:3 : Output at 4:3 aspect ratio with black bars on the sides of a 16:9 TV screen. (except for 480p/576p output)

0 This item can be set when i/p Scaler is set to anything other than Off. (v p. 205)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

207Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Analog Video Out Selects the zone that uses component video output and video output.

o Component Selects the zone that uses component video output. MAIN ZONE (Default): Used in the MAIN ZONE. ZONE2: Used in the ZONE2. ZONE3: Used in the ZONE3.

o Video Selects the zone that uses video output. MAIN ZONE (Default): Used in the MAIN ZONE. ZONE3: Used in the ZONE3.

On Screen Display Select the on-screen display user interface preferences.

o Volume Sets where to display the volume level. Bottom (Default): Display at the bottom. Top: Display at the top. Off: Turn display off.

0 When the master volume display is hard to see when superimposed text (closed captioning) or movie subtitles are present, set to Top.

o Info Displays status of operation temporarily when the input source is switched. On (Default): Turn display on. Off: Turn display off.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

208Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Now Playing Sets the display time for the playback display when the input source is HEOS Music. Always On (Default): Show display continuously.

Auto Off: Show display for 30 seconds after operation.

4K/8K Signal Format Set the format of 4K and 8K signal to be played back by this unit when the TV or playback device connected to this unit is HDMI 4K or 8K signal compatible. o 4K/8K Signal Format

Set the format of 4K and 8K signal played back by this unit.

Standard: Select if your TV and playback devices support 4K 60p 4:2:0 8 bit video signals.

Enhanced (Default):

Select if your TV, playback devices, and cables support high quality 4K 60p 4:4:4 8 bit, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 10 bit video signals.

8K Enhanced: Select if your TV, playback devices, and cables support high quality 8K 60p or 4K 120p video signals.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

209Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

GRelation between the 4K/8K Signal Format setting and supported resolutionsH

Support Resolution

Color Space

Pixel Depth

4K/8K Signal Format Standard Enhanced 8K

Enhanced 4K 24p, 4K 30p, 4K 25p

RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4

8 bit P P P

10,12 bit P P

YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit P P P

4K 60p, 4K 50p

YCbCr 4:2:0 8 bit P P P

10,12 bit P P

RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4

8 bit P P

10,12 bit P

YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit P P

4K 120p, 4K 100p

YCbCr 4:2:0 8,10,12 bit P

RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4 8,10 bit P

YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit P

8K 24p, 8K 30p, 8K 25p

YCbCr 4:2:0 8,10,12 bit P

RGB / YCbCr 4:4:4 8,10 bit P

YCbCr 4:2:2 12 bit P

8K 60p, 8K 50p YCbCr 4:2:0 8, 10 bit P

0 When setting this to Enhanced, we recommend using a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet that has an HDMI Premium Certified Cable label attached to the product package.

0 When setting this to 8K Enhanced, we recommend using an Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable.

0 When this setting is Enhanced or 8K Enhanced, configure the television or playback device settings to match this setting.

0 When this setting is Enhanced or 8K Enhanced, video may not be output correctly depending on the connected playback device or HDMI cable. In this case, change this setting to Standard.

0 Custom is displayed for the setting item if our service engineers or custom installers has configured the HDMI signal format for this unit.

0 4K/8K Signal Format can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the setting. 1. Press and hold the main units STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same

time for at least 3 seconds. zVideo Format < PAL> appears on the display.

2. Use u or i on the main unit. 4K/8K Format appears on the display.

3. Use o or p on the main unit to select the 4K/8K Signal Format. 4. Press the main units ENTER to complete the setting.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

210Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

TV Format Set the video signal format to be output for the TV you are using.

o Format PAL (Default): Select PAL output. NTSC: Select NTSC output.

0 Format can also be set by the following procedure. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Following the display content to make the setting. 1. Press and hold the main units STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same

time for at least 3 seconds. zVideo Format appears on the display.

2. Use the main units o or p and set the video signal format. 3. Press the main units ENTER to complete the setting.

NOTE 0 When a format other than the video format of the connected TV is set, the

picture will not be displayed properly.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

211Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Inputs Perform settings related to input source playback. You do not have to change the settings to use the unit. Make settings when needed.

Input Assign By making connections as indicated by the input sources printed on the audio/video input connectors of this unit, you can just press one of the input source select buttons to easily play back audio or video from a connected device. Please change the assignment of the HDMI input connector, digital audio input connector, analog audio input connector, component video input connector and video input connector when connecting an input source that differs from that printed to the audio/video input connectors of this unit.

.

DIGITAL ANALOGHDMI COMP VIDEO

Inputs/Input Assign

Set Defaults CBL/SAT DVD Blu-ray Game Media Player TV Audio AUX1 AUX2

1 2 3 4 5 -

Front 7(8K)

1 2 3 4 5 - - -

1 2 3 - - - - -

1 2 3 4 - - - -

COAX1 COAX2

- - -

OPT1 - -

Changes HDMI input assignments

CD - 6 - -OPT2

0 By default, each item is set as follows.

Input source Input connector HDMI DIGITAL ANALOG COMP VIDEO

CBL/SAT 1 COAX1 1 1 1 DVD 2 COAX2 2 2 2 Blu-ray 3 3 3 3 Game 4 4 4 Media Player 5 5 TV Audio OPT1 AUX1 Front AUX2 7(8K) CD OPT2 6

n TV set top box/satellite users please note When using the digital audio output on a TV/satellite box: To play the video signal assigned to HDMI combined with the audio signal assigned at Input Assign - DIGITAL, you will also need to select Digital in the Input Mode. (v p. 216)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

212Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o HDMI Set this to change the HDMI input connectors assigned to the input sources. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7(8K) / Front:

Assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.

: Do not assign an HDMI input connector to the selected input source.

0 When HDMI Control or ARC is set to On in the menu, HDMI cannot be assigned to TV Audio. (HDMI Control (v p. 201), ARC (v p. 201))

0 The eARC function does not operate when HDMI is set as the TV Audio input source.

o DIGITAL Set this to change the digital audio input connectors assigned to the input sources. COAX1 (Coaxial) / COAX2 / OPT1 (Optical) / OPT2:

Assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.

: Do not assign a digital audio input connector to the selected input source.

o ANALOG Set this to change the analog audio input connectors assigned to the input sources. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6: Assign a analog audio input connector to

the selected input source. : Do not assign a analog audio input

connector to the selected input source.

o COMP (Component video) Set this to change the component video input connectors assigned to the input sources. 1 / 2 / 3: Assign the component video input

connector to the selected input source. : Do not assign a component video input

connector to the selected input source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

213Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o VIDEO Set this to change the composite video input connectors assigned to the input sources. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4: Assign the video input connector to the

selected input source. : Do not assign a video input connector to

the selected input source.

o Set Defaults The Input Assign settings are returned to the default settings.

Source Rename Change the display name for input source. This is convenient when the name of your device and the input source name of this unit are different. You can change the name to suit your needs. When the renaming is completed, the name is displayed on this units display and on the menu screen. CBL/SAT / DVD / Blu-ray / Game / Media Player / AUX1 / AUX2/ TV Audio / CD / Phono / Tuner:

Change the display name for input source.

Set Defaults: The Source Rename settings are returned to the default settings.

0 Up to 12 characters can be input.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

214Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Hide Sources Remove from the display input sources that are not used. Show (Default): Use this source. Hide: Do not use this source.

Source Level This function corrects the playback level of the selected input sources audio input. Make this setting if there are differences in the input volume levels between the different sources.

o Source Level n When the input source is set to HEOS Music

-12 dB +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

o Analog Inputs / Digital Inputs n When the input source is set other than to HEOS

Music -12dB +12dB (Default : 0dB)

0 The analog input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which ANALOG is assigned at Input Assign. (v p. 212)

0 The digital input level can be adjusted independently for input sources for which DIGITAL is assigned at Input Assign. (v p. 212)

0 Source Level settings are stored for each input source.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

215Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Input Select Set the audio input mode of each input source. The input modes available for selection may vary depending on the input source.

0 Input Select settings are stored for each input source.

o Input Mode Set the audio input modes for the different input sources. It is normally recommended to set the audio input mode to Auto. Auto (Default):

Automatically detect input signal and perform playback.

HDMI: Play only signals from HDMI input. Digital: Play only signals from digital audio input. Analog: Play only signals from analog audio input. 7.1CH IN: Only signals input from the 7.1CH IN

connector will be played back.

0 When digital signals are properly input, the ~ indicator lights on the display. If the ~ indicator does not light, check Input Assign and the connections. (v p. 212)

0 If HDMI Control is set to On and a TV compatible with the ARC is connected via the HDMI MONITOR 1 connectors, the input mode whose input source is TV Audio is fixed to ARC.

0 When an eARC function-compatible television is connected to the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector, the input mode is fixed to eARC while the input source is TV Audio.

0 The sound mode cannot be set if the input mode is set to 7.1CH IN.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

216Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speakers The acoustic characteristics of the connected speakers and listening room are measured and the optimum settings are made automatically. This is called Audyssey Setup. You do not have to perform Audyssey Setup when you have already performed Speaker Calibration in Setup Assistant. To set up the speakers manually, use Manual Setup on the menu. (v p. 228)

Audyssey Setup To perform measurement, place the Sound calibration microphone in multiple locations all around the listening area. For best results, we recommend you measure in six or more positions, as shown in the illustration (up to eight positions). When measuring the second and subsequent positions, install the Sound calibration microphone within 60 cm of the first measurement position (main listening position).

0 If you perform Audyssey Setup, Audyssey MultEQ XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ, Audyssey Dynamic Volume and Audyssey LFC functions are enabled. (v p. 192)

.

FL SW C FR

SRSL

Surround speaker (R) Surround speaker (L) Subwoofer Center speaker Front speaker (R) Front speaker (L)

( :Measuring positions)

FL FR C SW SL SR

Listening position

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

217Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o About the main listening position The main listening position is the position where listeners would normally sit or where one would normally sit alone within the listening environment. Before starting Audyssey Setup, place the Sound calibration microphone in the main listening position. Audyssey MultEQ XT32 uses the measurements from this position to calculate speaker distance, level, polarity, and the optimum crossover value for the subwoofer.

o About Audyssey Sub EQ HT Audyssey Sub EQ HT makes the integration of dual subwoofers seamless by first compensating for any level and delay differences between the two subwoofers and then applying Audyssey MultEQ XT32 to both subwoofers together. To run Audyssey Sub EQ HT you must select Measure (2 spkrs) in Channel Select. (v p. 220).

NOTE 0 Make the room as quiet as possible. Background noise can disrupt the room

measurements. Close windows and turn off the power on electronic devices (radios, air conditioners, fluorescent lights, etc.). The measurements could be affected by the sounds emitted by such devices.

0 During the measurement process, place cell phones outside the listening room. Cell phone signals could disrupt the measurements.

0 Do not stand between the speakers and Sound calibration microphone or allow obstacles in the path while the measurements are being made. Also, install the Sound calibration microphone at least 50 cm away from the wall. Failure to do so will result in inaccurate readings.

0 During the measurement process, audible test tones will come from the speakers and subwoofer(s), but this is part of normal operation. If there is background noise in the room, these test signals will increase in volume.

0 Operating VOLUME d f on the remote control unit or MASTER VOLUME on the main unit during the measurements will cancel the measurements.

0 Measurement cannot be performed when headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones before performing Audyssey Setup.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

218Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Procedure for speaker settings (Audyssey Setup)

.

Finish

Check

Calculation & Store

Measurement

Preparation

1 Attach the Sound calibration microphone to the supplied microphone stand or own tripod and install it at the main listening position. When installing the Sound calibration microphone, point the tip of the microphone toward the ceiling and adjust the height to match the height of the ears of a listener in a seated position.

2 If using a subwoofer capable of the following adjustments, set up the subwoofer as shown below. n When using a subwoofer with a direct mode

Set the direct mode to On and disable the volume adjustment and crossover frequency setting.

n When using a subwoofer without a direct mode Make the following settings: 0 Volume : 12 oclock position 0 Crossover frequency : Maximum/Highest Frequency 0 Low pass filter : Off 0 Standby mode : Off

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

219Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

3 Connect the Sound calibration microphone to the SETUP MIC jack of this unit.

.

When the Sound calibration microphone is connected, the following screen is displayed.

.

Audyssey Setup

Dolby Speaker Setup Channel Select

Amp Assign

Start

Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of your room then optimize your speakers using the included microphone and microphone stand. Set the following items if necessary.

4 Select Start, then press ENTER. Audyssey Setup can also make the following settings. 0 Amp Assign

The signals output from the SURROUND BACK, HEIGHT1, HEIGHT2, HEIGHT3 and HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE speaker terminals can be switched in accordance with your speaker environment. (Amp Assign (v p. 228))

0 Channel Select If channels that are not to be used are set in advance, measurement for the set channels is skipped, and measuring time can be reduced. You can also change the number of surround back speakers and subwoofer.

0 Dolby Speaker Setup Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling. This can be set when using the Front Dolby Atmos Enabled, Surround Dolby Atmos Enabled or Back Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker.

5 Follow the instructions on the screen display and press Next to proceed further.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

220Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

6 When the following screen is displayed, select Begin Test and then press ENTER. Start the measurement of the first position.

.

Begin TestBack

Select Begin Test to start the calibration. NOTE: You will hear a series of loud chirps starting and stopping during the tests.

Audyssey Setup

Ear Height

0 Measurement requires several minutes.

NOTE 0 If Caution! is displayed on TV screen: 0 Go to Error messages (v p. 225). Check any related items, and

perform the necessary procedures. 0 If the volume level for the subwoofer is not appropriate, an error message

is displayed. See Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust (v p. 226).

7 When the detected speaker is displayed, select Next and then press ENTER.

.

Audyssey Setup

Repeat Last Test Next

Speaker Detection

Front Center Subwoofer Surround Surr. Back

:Yes :Yes :1spkr :Yes :No

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

221Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

8 Move the Sound calibration microphone to position 2, select Continue, then press ENTER. The measurement of the second position starts. Measurements can be made in up to eight positions.

.

Continue

Place the microphone ear level of the listener seated at the 2nd listening position, which should be no more than 60 cm away from the 1st position, then select Continue...

Audyssey Setup

Back

Ear Height

n Stopping Audyssey Setup A Press BACK to display the popup screen. B Press o to select Yes, then press ENTER.

9 Repeat step 8, measuring positions 3 to 8.

0 To skip measuring the fourth and subsequent listening position, press o to select Complete and press ENTER to proceed to step 11.

10 Select Continue, then press ENTER.

.

Audyssey Setup

ContinueRepeat Last Test

Measurements complete. Select Continue to analyze the data...

Start the analysis and storage of the measurement results. 0 Analysis takes several minutes to complete.

The more speakers and measurement positions that there are, the more time it takes to perform the analysis.

NOTE 0 When the measurement results are being saved, make sure the power is

not turned off.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

222Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

11 Perform the settings for Audyssey Dynamic EQ and Audyssey Dynamic Volume. The following screen is displayed during the analysis. Configure the settings as preferred.

.

Audyssey Setup Audyssey Dynamic EQ maintains bass, clarity and surround sound at low volumes letting you enjoy late-night movies and television.

Turn on Dynamic EQ?

Yes No

Analyzing room data 50%

0 Dynamic EQ corrects the frequency response in consideration of the audio characteristics of the room and human hearing ability so that sound can be heard even at low volume. This is recommended when using the unit with the volume turned down, e.g. when enjoying a movie or TV program in the middle of the night.

0 Dynamic Volume adjusts the output volume to the optimal level while constantly monitoring the level of the audio input to the unit. Optimal volume control is performed automatically without any loss in the dynamism and clarity of the sound when, for example, the volume suddenly increases for commercials shown during television programs.

12 When the analysis and storage ends, unplug the Sound calibration microphone from the SETUP MIC jack on the main unit and then press Next.

.

Audyssey Setup Now Analyzing and correcting your room data. Please disconnect the microphone from your AV receiver.

NextBack

Applying room corrections 100%

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

223Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

13 Select Details and press ENTER to verify the measurement results. 0 Subwoofers may measure a greater reported distance than the

actual distance due to added electrical delay common in subwoofers.

NOTE 0 Do not enable new speakers in speaker configuration menu after Audyssey

Setup. If it is changed, run Audyssey Setup again in order to configure the optimum equalizer settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

224Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Error messages An error message is displayed if Audyssey Setup could not be completed due to speaker placement, the measurement environment, etc. If an error message is displayed, check the relevant items and perform the necessary measures. Be sure to turn off the power before checking speaker connections.

Examples Error details Measures No speakers found. 0 Sound calibration microphone is not

detected. 0 Connect the included Sound calibration microphone to the

SETUP MIC jack of this unit. 0 Not all speakers could be detected. 0 Check the speaker connections.

Ambient noise is too high or level is too low

0 There is too much noise in the room. 0 Either turn off any device generating noise or move it away. 0 Perform again when the surroundings are quieter.

0 Speaker or subwoofer sound is too low. 0 Check the speaker installation and the direction in which the speakers are facing.

0 Adjust the subwoofers volume. Front R : None 0 The displayed speaker could not be

detected. 0 Check the connections of the displayed speaker.

Front R : Phase 0 The displayed speaker is connected with the polarity reversed.

0 Check the polarity of the displayed speaker. 0 For some speakers, this error message may be displayed

even if the speaker is properly connected. If you are sure the connection is correct, press p to select Ignore, then press ENTER.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

225Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Subwoofer level error message and how to adjust The optimal level of each subwoofer channel for Audyssey Setup measurement is 75 dB. During subwoofer level measurement, an error message is displayed when one level of subwoofers is outside the 72 78 dB range. When using a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (active type), adjust the subwoofer volume so that the subwoofer level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.

G Error message H

.

Audyssey Setup

Back SW Level MatchingSkip

Your Subwoofer 1s level is too high. If your subwoofer has a volume control on it, select SW Level Matching to interactively adjust the level of your subwoofer.

If your subwoofer does not have a volume control, or if you do not want to use a subwoofer, select Skip.

1 Select SW Level Matching and then press ENTER.

2 Adjust the volume control on your subwoofer so that the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range.

3 When the measured level is within the 72 to 78 dB range, select Next and then press ENTER. 0 If you use two subwoofers, the second subwoofers adjustment

will be started. Repeat the operation from step 2, 3.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

226Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Retrieving Audyssey Setup settings If you set Restore... to Restore, you can return to Audyssey Setup measurement result (value calculated at the start by MultEQ XT32) even when you have changed each setting manually.

.

Audyssey Setup

Dolby Speaker Setup Channel Select

Amp Assign

Check Results Restore...

Start

Your AV receiver can automatically measure the acoustics of your room then optimize your speakers using the included microphone and microphone stand. Set the following items if necessary.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

227Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Manual Setup Perform when setting the speakers manually or when changing settings made in Audyssey Setup. 0 If you enable new speakers in the speaker configuration menu after

performing Audyssey Setup, you will no longer be able to select Audyssey MultEQ XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ or Audyssey Dynamic Volume. (v p. 192)

0 Changing the following settings: Speaker size (Large or Small) / Distances / Levels / Crossovers settings will not disable Audyssey or require running Audyssey Setup again.

0 Manual Setup can be used without changing the settings. Please set if necessary.

Amp Assign Select the power amplifier usage method to match your speaker system. o Assign Mode

Select how to use the power amp. You need to configure the detailed settings for the speaker configuration in accordance with the selected mode. Select Assign Mode configure the corresponding detailed settings.

13.1ch (Default):

0 Settings to assign all power amplifier within this unit to MAIN ZONE to play back up to 13.1-channels.

0 You can connect speakers for up to 15.1- channels for MAIN ZONE.

The speaker output automatically switches for playing back up to 13.1-channels in accordance with the input signal and sound mode when 15.1-channel speakers are installed.

11.1ch + ZONE2: 0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in

this unit for ZONE2 to 2-channels. 0 You can connect speakers for up to 11.1-

channels for MAIN ZONE.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

228Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

11.1ch + ZONE3: 0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in

this unit for ZONE3 to 2-channels 0 You can connect speakers for up to 11.1-

channels for MAIN ZONE.

9.1ch + ZONE2/3:

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit for ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to two different channel.

0 You can connect speakers for up to 9.1- channels for MAIN ZONE.

11.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO:

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 and ZONE3 each to a different channel.

0 You can connect speakers for up to 11.1- channels for MAIN ZONE.

11.1ch (Bi-Amp):

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.

0 You can connect speakers for up to 11.1- channels for MAIN ZONE.

9.1ch (Bi-Amp) + ZONE2:

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for front speaker bi-amp connection to 2-channels.

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for ZONE2 to 2-channels.

5.1ch Full Bi-Amp:

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers in this unit for front, center and surround speakers to 10 channels.

0 You can connect speakers for up to 5.1 channels for MAIN ZONE.

11.1ch + Front B:

0 Setting to assign the power amplifiers within this unit for connecting the second set of front speakers.

0 You can switch between the desired combination of front speakers A and front speakers B.

Switch the front speaker using the Front Speaker setting. (v p. 248)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

229Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Pre Amplifier:

0 All of the speakers are connected using an external power amplifier and this unit is used as a pre amplifier.

0 You can connect speakers for up to 15.1- channels for MAIN ZONE.

The pre-out output automatically switches for playing back up to 13.1-channels in accordance with the input signals and sound mode when 15.1-channel speakers are installed.

Custom:

0 The internal amplifier of this unit is assigned as desired.

0 You can connect speakers for up to 13.1- channels for MAIN ZONE.

Set the channel to be assigned to the speaker terminal in Settings. (v p. 237)

o Speakers for ZONE2 / Speakers for ZONE3 / Speakers for ZONE2/3 / Speakers for Bi-Amp / Speakers for 2ch / Speakers for Front B When Assign Mode is set to 11.1ch + ZONE2, 11.1ch + ZONE3, 11.1ch + ZONE2/3-MONO, 9.1ch + ZONE2/3, 11.1ch (Bi-Amp) or 11.1ch + Front B in the menu, select the speaker terminal from which to output the channels to which the internal amplifier is assigned. (v p. 228)

HEIGHT 2: The assigned channels are output from the HEIGHT2 speaker terminals. Up to one set of height, ceiling, and Dolby Atmos Enabled channels can be used.

HEIGHT 3: The assigned channels are output from the HEIGHT3 speaker terminals.

SURROUND BACK: The assigned channels are output from the SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. The surround back channel cannot be used.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

230Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Floor n Layout Select the floor speakers location.

5ch & SB & FW: This layout combines a surround back or front wide speaker with the basic 5- channel layout.

5ch & SB (Default):

This layout combines a surround back speaker with the basic 5-channel layout.

5ch & FW: This layout combines a front wide speaker with the basic 5-channel layout.

5ch: This is a basic 5-channel layout that uses front speakers, center speakers and surround speakers.

o Height n Height Sp Select the number of the height speakers and ceiling speakers used in MAIN ZONE. None: Uses no height and ceiling speakers. 2ch: Uses a set of (two) height speakers or

ceiling speakers. 4ch: Uses two sets of (four) height speakers or

ceiling speakers. 5ch: Uses five height or ceiling speakers. 6ch: Uses six height or ceiling speakers. 7ch: Uses seven height or ceiling speakers. 8ch (Default): Uses eight height or ceiling speakers.

0 Select the 5ch setting or higher when using Top Surround or Center Height speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

231Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n Dolby Sp Select the number of the Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers used in MAIN ZONE. None (Default): Uses no Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

2ch: Uses a set of (two) Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

4ch: Uses two sets of (four) Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

6ch: Uses three sets of (six) Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

232Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n Layout Set the speaker layout when installing 1 set (2-channels) of Height, Ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers. The layouts that can be selected differ depending on the combinations of Assign Mode and Floor - Layout in the menu. (Assign Mode (v p. 228), Floor - Layout (v p. 231))

Settings AUDIO OUT connectors Height Sp Dolby Sp Layout HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2 HEIGHT 3 HEIGHT 4/FRONT

WIDE None None - - - - -

2ch None

Front Height Front Height - - - Top Front Top Front - - -

Top Middle Top Middle - - - Top Rear Top Rear - - -

Rear Height Rear Height - - -

None 2ch Front Dolby Front Dolby - - -

Surround Dolby Surround Dolby - - - Back Dolby z Back Dolby - - -

zThis can be selected when using Surround Back speakers. Set Floor - Layout in the menu to 5ch & SB or 5ch & SB & FW. (v p. 231)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

233Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n Front Layout / Middle Layout / Rear Layout Set the speaker layout when installing 2 sets (4-channels) or more of Height, Ceiling or Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers. The layouts that can be selected differ depending on the combinations of Assign Mode and Floor - Layout in the menu. (Assign Mode (v p. 228), Floor - Layout (v p. 231))

Settings AUDIO OUT connectors Height

Sp Dolby Sp NOTE Front Layout Middle Layout Rear Layout HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2 HEIGHT 3 HEIGHT 4/

FRONT WIDE

2ch 2ch

Front Dolby - Top Rear Front Dolby Top Rear - - Front Dolby - Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height - - Front Height - Surround

Dolby Front Height Surround Dolby - -

Front Height - Back Dolbyz1 Front Height Back Dolby - -

Top Front - Surround Dolby Top Front Surround

Dolby - -

Top Front - Back Dolbyz1 Top Front Back Dolby - -

4ch None

Front Height - Top Middle Front Height Top Middle - - Front Height - Top Rear Front Height Top Rear - - Front Height - Rear Heightz2 Front Height Rear Height - - Front Height - Surr. Height Front Height Surr. Height - -

Top Front - Top Rear Top Front Top Rear - - Top Front - Rear Height Top Front Rear Height - -

Top Middle - Rear Height Top Middle Rear Height - -

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

234Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Settings AUDIO OUT connectors Height

Sp Dolby Sp NOTE Front Layout Middle Layout Rear Layout HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2 HEIGHT 3 HEIGHT 4/

FRONT WIDE

None 4ch Front Dolby - Surround

Dolby Front Dolby Surround Dolby - -

Front Dolby - Back Dolbyz1 Front Dolby Back Dolby - -

5ch None z3

Front Height Top Surround Rear Heightz2 Front Height Rear Height L: Top Surround -

Front Height Surr. Height & Top Surround None Front Height Surr. Height L: Top

Surround - Front Height & Center Height None Rear Heightz2 Front Height Rear Height R: Center

Height - Front Height & Center Height Surr. Height None Front Height Surr. Height R: Center

Height -

6ch None

z3 z4 Front Height Surr. Height Rear Height Front Height Rear Height Surr. Height -

z3

Front Height & Center Height Top Surround Rear Heightz2 Front Height Rear Height

L: Top Surround R: Center

Height -

Front Height & Center Height

Surr. Height & Top Surround None Front Height Surr. Height

L: Top Surround R: Center

Height -

z5 Front Height Top Middle Rear Height Front Height Rear Height Top Middle - Top Front Top Middle Top Rear Top Front Top Rear Top Middle -

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

235Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Settings AUDIO OUT connectors Height

Sp Dolby Sp NOTE Front Layout Middle Layout Rear Layout HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2 HEIGHT 3 HEIGHT 4/

FRONT WIDE

4ch 2ch z3 Front Height Surround

Dolby Rear Height Front Height Rear Height Surround Dolby -

Top Front Surround Dolby Top Rear Top Front Top Rear Surround

Dolby -

2ch 4ch z3

Front Height Surround Dolby Back Dolbyz1 Front Height Back Dolby Surround

Dolby -

Front Dolby Top Middle Back Dolbyz1 Front Dolby Back Dolby Top Middle -

Front Dolby Surround Dolby Rear Height Front Dolby Rear Height Surround

Dolby -

None 6ch z3 Front Dolby Surround Dolby Back Dolbyz1 Front Dolby Back Dolby Surround

Dolby -

7ch None z3 z6 Front Height Top Middle &

Top Surround Rear Height Front Height Rear Height Top Middle L: Top Surround

Front Height & Center Height Top Middle Rear Height Front Height Rear Height Top Middle R: Center

Height

5ch 2ch z3 z6 Front Height Surr. Dolby &

Top Surround Rear Height Front Height Rear Height Surround Dolby

L: Top Surround

Front Height & Center Height

Surround Dolby Rear Height Front Height Rear Height Surround

Dolby R: Center

Height

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

236Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Settings AUDIO OUT connectors Height

Sp Dolby Sp NOTE Front Layout Middle Layout Rear Layout HEIGHT 1 HEIGHT 2 HEIGHT 3 HEIGHT 4/

FRONT WIDE

8ch None z3 z6 Front Height & Center Height

Top Middle & Top Surround Rear Height Front Height Rear Height Top Middle

L: Top Surround R: Center

Height

6ch 2ch z3 z6 Front Height & Center Height

Surr. Dolby & Top Surround Rear Height Front Height Rear Height Surround

Dolby

L: Top Surround R: Center

Height z1 This can be selected when using Surround Back speakers. z2 For the best Auro-3D experience Surround Height speakers are recommended, however you may substitute Rear Height speakers from a Dolby Atmos speaker setup

in place of Surround Height speakers. z3 This can be set when Assign Mode in the menu is set to 13.1ch or 11.1ch. (v p. 228) z4 Use 2 sets of Height speakers in the appropriate sound modes for Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Auro-3D playback.

Use the Front Height and Rear Height speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback. Use the Front Height and Surround Height speakers for Auro-3D playback.

z5 This can be set when Assign Mode in the menu is set to 13.1ch or 11.1ch, and Floor - Layout is set to 5ch or 5ch & SB. (v p. 231) z6 This combination cannot be selected when Front Wide speakers are being used.

n Settings Select the signal to be output from the selected speaker terminal. 0 Only Center and None can be set for the CENTER speaker

terminal. 0 The HEIGHT4/FRONT WIDE speaker terminal is not used.

o View Terminal Config. This shows how to connect the speaker terminals and PRE OUT connectors for your Amp Assign setting on the menu screen.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

237Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speaker Config. Select whether or not speakers are present, playback capacity for low bass frequencies and speaker size.

0 When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in Amp Assign are set to None, None is automatically set for Height2, Height3 and Height4.

0 When speakers for which you assigned Height2 in Amp Assign are set to None, None is automatically set for Height3 and Height4.

o Front Set the front speaker size. Large (Default):

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small: Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

0 When Subwoofer is set to No, Front is automatically set to Large. 0 When Front is set to Small, you cannot set speakers other than Front to

Large.

o Center Set the presence and size of the center speaker.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when a center speaker is not connected.

o Subwoofer Set the presence of a subwoofer. 2 spkrs: Use two subwoofers. 1 spkr (Default): Use only one subwoofer.

None: Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

0 When Subwoofer is set to None and you set Front to Small, Subwoofer is automatically set to 1 spkr.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

238Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Surround Set the presence and size of the surround speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the surround speakers are not connected.

0 When Surround is set to None, Surr. Back, Front Wide, Surround Dolby and Back Dolby are automatically set to None.

o Surr. Back Set the presence, size and number of surround back speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the surround back speakers are not connected.

2 spkrs (Default): Use two surround back speakers.

1 spkr: Use only one surround back speaker. Connect to the L terminal to SURROUND BACK when this setting is selected.

0 When Surr. Back is set to None or 1 spkr, Back Dolby is automatically set to None.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

239Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Front Wide Set the presence and size of the front wide speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the front wide speakers are not connected.

o Front Height Set the presence and size of the front height speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the front height speakers are not connected.

o Front Dolby Set the presence and size of the front Dolby speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the front Dolby speakers are not connected.

o Top Front Set the presence and size of the top front speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the top front speakers are not connected.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

240Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Top Middle Set the presence and size of the top middle speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the top middle speakers are not connected.

o Surround Dolby Set the presence and size of the surround Dolby speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the surround Dolby speakers are not connected.

o Top Rear Set the presence and size of the top rear speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the top rear speakers are not connected.

o Surr. Height Set the presence and size of the surround height speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the surround height speakers are not connected.

0 When Front Height is set to None, Surr. Height is automatically set to None.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

241Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Rear Height Set the presence and size of the rear height speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the rear height speakers are not connected.

o Back Dolby Set the presence and size of the back Dolby speakers.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the back Dolby speakers are not connected.

0 When speakers for which you assigned Height1 in Amp Assign are set to None, None is automatically set for Height2, Height3 and Height4.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

242Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Center Height Set the presence and size of the center height speaker.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the center height speaker is not connected.

0 When Surr. Height or Rear Height is set to None, Center Height is automatically set to None.

0 When Center is set to None, Center Height is automatically set to None.

o Top Surround Set the presence and size of the top surround speaker.

Large: Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small (Default):

Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

None: Select when the top surround speaker is not connected.

0 When Surr. Height or Rear Height is set to None, Top Surround is automatically set to None.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

243Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Distances Set distance from listening position to speakers. Measure beforehand the distance from the listening position to each speaker.

o Unit Set the unit of distance. Meters (Default) Feet

o Step Set the minimum variable width of the distance. 0.1 m / 0.01 m (Default: 0.1 m) 1 ft / 0.1 ft

o Set the distance 0.00 m 18.00 m / 0.0 ft 60.0 ft

0 The speakers that can be selected differ depending on the Amp Assign and Speaker Config. settings. (Amp Assign (v p. 228), Speaker Config. (v p. 238))

0 Default settings: Front L / Front R / Center / Subwoofer 1 / Subwoofer 2 / F. Wide L / F. Wide R / F. Height L / F. Height R / Front Dolby L / Front Dolby R / Center Height: 3.60 m (12.0 ft) Speakers other than the above: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)

0 Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 6.00 m (20.0 ft).

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

244Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Dolby Speaker Setup Set the distance between the Dolby Atmos Enabled speaker and the ceiling. 0.90 m - 3.30 m / 3.0 ft - 11.0 ft (Default : 1.80 m / 6.0 ft)

0 This can be set when Front Dolby, Surround Dolby or Back Dolby is set to Large or Small in Speaker Config..

o Set Defaults The Distances settings are returned to the default settings.

Levels Set the volume of the test tone to be the same at the listening position when it is output from each speaker.

o Test Tone Start A test tone is output from the selected speaker. While listening to the test tone, adjust the volume output from the selected speaker. 12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default : 0.0 dB)

0 The set Levels are reflected in all sound modes. 0 If you wish to adjust the channel level for each input source, carry out the

settings in Channel Level Adjust. (v p. 134) 0 When headphones are connected to the PHONES connector on this unit, you

cannot set Levels.

o Set Defaults The Levels settings are returned to the default settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

245Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Crossovers Set in accordance with the lower limit frequency of the base frequencies that can be played back through each speaker. See the speaker manual for information concerning speaker crossover frequency.

o Speaker Selection Selects how to set the crossover frequency. All (Default):

Sets the same crossover frequency for all speakers.

Individual: Selects the crossover points for each speaker individually.

o Set the crossover frequency 40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)

0 Crossovers can be set when the Subwoofer Mode setting is LFE+Main, or when you have a speaker that is set to Small. (v p. 247)

0 The default crossover frequency is 80 Hz, which will work best with the widest variety of speakers. We recommend setting to a higher frequency that the crossover frequency when small speakers are used. For example, set to 250 Hz when the frequency range of the speakers is 250 Hz 20 kHz.

0 Sound below the crossover frequency is cut off from the output of the speakers set in Small. This cut off bass frequency is output from the subwoofer or front speakers.

0 The speakers that can be set when Individual is selected differ depending on to the Subwoofer Mode setting. (v p. 247) 0 When LFE is selected, speakers set to Small at Speaker Config. can be

set. If the speakers are set to Large, Full Band is displayed and the setting cannot be made. (v p. 238)

0 When LFE+Main is selected, speakers can be set regardless of the Speaker Config. setting. (v p. 238)

0 The audio settings in IMAX Audio Settings are applied during IMAX playback. (v p. 185)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

246Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Bass Set subwoofer and LFE signal range playback.

o Subwoofer Mode Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.

LFE (Default):

The low range signal of the channel set to Small speaker size is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

LFE+Main: The low range signal of all channels is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

0 Subwoofer Mode can be set when Speaker Config. - Subwoofer in the menu is set to other than None. (v p. 238)

0 Play music or a movie source and select the mode offering the strongest bass. 0 If Speaker Config. - Front and Center are set to Large, and Subwoofer

Mode is set to LFE, no sound may be output from the subwoofers, depending on the input signal or selected sound mode. (v p. 238) Select LFE+Main if you want the bass signals to always be produced from the subwoofer.

0 The audio settings in IMAX Audio Settings are applied during IMAX playback. (v p. 185)

o LPF for LFE Set LFE signal playback range. Set this when you want to change the playback frequency (low pass filter point) of the subwoofer. 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 120 Hz)

0 The audio settings in IMAX Audio Settings are applied during IMAX playback. (v p. 185)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

247Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Front Speaker Set the front speaker A/B to use for every sound mode. A (Default): Front speaker A is used. B : Front speaker B is used. A+B : Both front speakers A and B are used.

0 This can be set when Assign Mode is set to 11.1ch + Front B. (v p. 229)

2ch Playback Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct and stereo playback modes.

o Setting Select the method for setting the speakers used in the 2-channel direct and stereo playback modes. Auto (Default):

The settings in Speakers are applied. (v p. 217)

Manual: Set the speakers for 2-channel playback. Make the following settings:

o Front Set the size of the front speakers for 2-channel playback. Large (Default):

Use a large speaker that can adequately play back very low bass frequencies.

Small: Use a small speaker that has inadequate playback capacity for very low bass frequencies.

0 When Speaker Config. - Subwoofer in the menu is set to None, Large is automatically set. (v p. 238)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

248Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Subwoofer Set the presence of a subwoofer. Yes (Default): Use a subwoofer.

No: Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

0 When Speaker Config. - Subwoofer in the menu is set to None, No is automatically set. (v p. 238) If the Front setting is Small, the setting is automatically Yes.

o SW Mode Select low range signals to be reproduced by subwoofer.

LFE (Default):

When 2ch Playback - Front is set to Large, only LFE signals are output from the subwoofer. Also, when 2ch Playback - Front is set to Small, the front channel low range signals are added to the LFE signals and output from the subwoofer.

LFE+Main: The front channel low range signal is added to the LFE signal output from the subwoofer.

0 This can be set when 2ch Playback - Subwoofer is set to Yes.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

249Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Crossover Set the maximum frequency of the bass signal output from each channel to the subwoofer. 40 Hz / 60 Hz / 80 Hz / 90 Hz / 100 Hz / 110 Hz / 120 Hz / 150 Hz / 180 Hz / 200 Hz / 250 Hz (Default: 80 Hz)

0 This can be set when 2ch Playback - Subwoofer is set to Yes. 0 When 2ch Playback - Front is set to Large and SW Mode is set to LFE,

Full Band is displayed and this cannot be set.

o Distance FL / Distance FR Set distance from main listening position to speaker. 0.00 m 18.00 m (Default : 3.60 m) / 0.0 ft 60.0 ft (Default : 12.0 ft)

0 Set the difference in the distance between the speakers to less than 6.00 m (20.0 ft).

o Level FL / Level FR Adjust the level of each channel. -12.0 dB +12.0 dB (Default: 0.0 dB)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

250Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Network To use this unit by connecting it to a home network (LAN), you must configure network settings. If you set up your home network (LAN) via DHCP, set DHCP to On. (Use the default setting.) This allows this unit to use your home network (LAN). When assigning an IP address to each device manually, you need to assign an IP address to this unit using the IP Address settings, and enter information about your home network (LAN) such as the gateway address and subnet mask, etc.

Information Display network information.

Friendly Name / Connection / SSID / DHCP / IP Address / MAC Address (Ethernet) / MAC Address (Wi-Fi) / Wi-Fi signal strength

Connection Choose whether to connect the home network to a wireless LAN or a wired LAN. When connecting to the network using wired LAN, select Wired (Ethernet) after connecting a LAN cable. When connecting to the network using wireless LAN, select Wireless (Wi- Fi) and configure the Wi-Fi Setup. (v p. 252)

o Connect Using Select the method for connecting to the home network (LAN). Wired (Ethernet): Use a LAN cable to connect to a network. Wireless (Wi-Fi) (Default):

Use the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) function to connect to a network.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

251Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Wi-Fi Setup Connect to a wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) router. The router can be connected in the following ways. Select the connection method to suit your home environment.

o Scan Networks Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of possible networks shown on the TV screen. 1. Select the network you wish to connect to from the list of wireless

networks. Select Rescan if the network cannot be found.

2. Enter your password and select OK.

o Use iOS Device Use your iOS device (iPhone/iPod/iPad) to connect to the network. By connecting your iOS device to this unit using Wi-Fi, the unit can be automatically connected to the same network as your device. 1. Select Use iOS Device on the TV screen. 2. Check that your iOS device is connected to the wireless LAN (Wi-

Fi) router and select Denon AVC-X8500H from SET UP NEW AIRPLAY SPEAKER... at the bottom of the Wi-Fi configuration screen of your iOS device.

3. Tap Next on the screen of the iOS device.

0 The iOS device firmware version needs to support iOS 7 or later.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

252Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o WPS Router Use a WPS-compatible router to connect using the push button method. 1. Select Push Button on the TV screen. 2. Switch to the WPS mode by pressing the WPS button of the router

you wish to connect to. 0 The time for pressing the button varies depending on the router.

3. Select Connect on the TV screen within 2 minutes.

o Manual Enter the name (SSID) and password of the network you wish to connect to. 1. Set the following items.

SSID: Input the name of the wireless network (SSID).

Security: Select the encryption method according to the encryption setting of the access point you are using.

Password: Input the password. 2. Select Connect at the end of the setting.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

253Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 The wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) settings of this unit can also be configured from a PC or tablet that supports wireless LAN connection. 1. Press and hold the DIMMER and STATUS buttons on the main unit for at least 3

seconds when the power of the unit is on. 2. Connect the wireless LAN of the PC or tablet used to Denon AVC-X8500H

when the message Connect your Wi-Fi device to Wi-Fi network called Denon AVC-X8500H. appears in the display.

3. Start up the browser and enter 192.168.1.16/settings/ in the URL. 4. Use the browser to enter the settings, select Connect and then exit the

settings. 0 The Default key of this unit is fixed at 1. Set Default key of the router to 1 to use.

Settings Configure the IP address. 0 If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), the information

required for network connection such as the IP address will be automatically configured since the DHCP function is set to On in the default settings of this unit.

0 Set up the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway and DNS server information only when assigning a fixed IP address or when connecting to a network without DHCP function.

.

DHCP -IP Address -Subnet Mask

Save Cancel

-Default Gateway -DNS

Configures the network settings automatically or manually

Off Network/Settings

000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

254Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o DHCP Selects how to connect to the network. On (Default):

Configure the network settings automatically from your router.

Off: Configure the network settings manually.

o IP Address Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. 0 The Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses

are set. CLASS A: 10.0.0.1 - 10.255.255.254 CLASS B: 172.16.0.1 - 172.31.255.254 CLASS C: 192.168.0.1 - 192.168.255.254

o Subnet Mask When connecting an xDSL modem or connector adapter directly to this unit, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input 255.255.255.0.

o Default Gateway When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.

o DNS Enter the DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider.

0 If you cannot connect to the Internet, recheck the connections and settings. (v p. 95)

0 If you do not understand about Internet connection, contact your ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the store from which you purchased your computer.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

255Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Network Control Enables network communication in standby power mode. Off In Standby (Default): Suspend network function during standby.

Always On: Network is on during standby. Main unit operable with a network compatible controller.

0 When using the web control function, Denon 2016 AVR Remote App or HEOS App, use with the Network Control setting set to Always On.

NOTE 0 When Network Control is set to Always On, the unit consumes more standby

power.

Friendly Name The Friendly Name is the name of this unit displayed on the network. You can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences.

o Friendly Name Selects Friendly Name from the list. When you select Other, you can change the Friendly Name according to your preferences. Home Theater /Living Room / Family Room / Guest Room / Kitchen / Dining Room / Master Bedroom / Bedroom / Den / Office / Other

0 Up to 30 characters can be input. 0 The default Friendly Name on first use is Denon AVC-X8500H.

o Set Defaults Restores Friendly Name, which you had changed, to the default setting.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

256Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Diagnostics Used to check the network connection.

o Physical Connection Checks the physical LAN port connection. OK Error: The LAN cable is not connected. Check

the connection.

0 When connected using a wireless LAN, Connection Wireless (Wi-Fi) will be displayed.

o Router Access Checks the connection from this unit to the router. OK Error: Failed to communicate with the router.

Check the router settings.

o Internet Access Checks whether this unit has access to the Internet (WAN). OK

Error: Failed to connect to the Internet. Check the Internet connection environment or router settings.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

257Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

HEOS Account Make HEOS Account-related settings. HEOS Account is needed in order to use HEOS Favorites. The menu displayed differs depending on the status of the HEOS Account.

You have not signed in o I have a HEOS Account

If you already have a HEOS Account, enter the current account name and password to sign in.

o Create Account If you do not have a HEOS Account, create a new HEOS Account.

o Forgot Password If you have forgotten the password, an email explaining how to reset the password will be sent.

You have already signed in o Signed in As

The currently signed in HEOS Account is displayed. o Change Location

Change the regional settings for the signed in HEOS Account. o Change Password

Change the password for the signed in HEOS Account. o Delete Account

Delete the signed in HEOS Account. o Sign Out

Sign out from the HEOS Account.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

258Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

General Make various other settings.

Language Set the language for display the menu on the TV screen. English / Deutsch / Franais / Italiano / Espaol / Nederlands / Svenska / P / Polski (Default : English)

0 Language can also be set up by the following operation. However, the menu screen is not displayed. Watch the display while configuring the settings. 1. Press and hold the main units STATUS and ZONE3 SOURCE at the same time

for at least 3 seconds. zVideo Format appears on the display.

2. Use u or i on the main unit twice. zGUI Language appears on the display.

3. Use the main units o or p and set the language. 4. Press the main units ENTER to complete the setting.

ECO Configure the ECO Mode and auto standby mode settings.

o ECO Mode This mode can reduce the power consumption and heat generation of this unit when power on. This is done by reducing the power supply line to the power amplifier, in turn the maximum power output.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

259Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

On: Power savings are always active, regardless of volume or input signal.

Auto (Default):

Gives you the best balance between power savings and maximum power output: For low volume levels, the power savings are active. If you increase the volume level, the power savings are switched off automatically, so you can enjoy maximum output power without distortion. If the volume is set to a high level but no input signal is detected for more than 2 minutes, this unit will enable power savings. When an input signal is detected again or the input source is changed, this unit will automatically turn off power savings again at high volume levels.

Off: No power savings.

0 When the unit is switching between the different power saving states in ECO Mode: Auto, you may notice a click noise from the inside of this unit, this is normal.

0 If content is paused for more than 2 minutes and playback is resumed from the same source at these high volume levels, there may be short delay before maximum power is restored.

0 ECO Mode can also be switched by pressing ECO G on the remote control unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

260Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Power On Default Set the mode to ECO when the power is on.

Last (Default):

The ECO Mode will be set to the previous setting before the power was switched off.

On: When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in On.

Auto: When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in Auto.

Off: When power is turned on, the mode will always be switched to the ECO Mode in Off.

o On Screen Display Display the power consumption of this unit using a meter on the TV screen.

Always On: Always display the meter on the TV screen.

Auto (Default):

Display the meter when changing the mode or volume.

Off: Do not display the meter.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

261Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Auto Standby Set so the unit power automatically switches to standby. n MAIN ZONE Sets the time for switching to auto standby when there are no audio or video signals input into this unit. Before the unit enters standby mode, Auto Standby is displayed on the unit display and the menu screen. 60 min: The unit goes into standby after 60 minutes. 30 min: The unit goes into standby after 30 minutes. 15 min (Default): The unit goes into standby after 15 minutes.

Off: The unit does not go into standby automatically.

n ZONE2 / ZONE3 When there are no operations for a certain period of time as set here, the power is automatically shut off even if there is audio or video input.

8 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 the standby state after about 8 hours.

4 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby state after about 4 hours.

2 hours: Switches ZONE2/ZONE3 to the standby state after about 2 hours.

Off (Default):

Does not automatically switch ZONE2/ ZONE3 to the standby state.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

262Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

ZONE2 Setup / ZONE3 Setup Makes settings for audio playback with ZONE2 and ZONE3.

0 Values set for Volume Limit and Power On Volume are displayed according to the setting specified for the volume Scale. (v p. 191)

o Bass Adjust bass. -10dB +10dB (Default : 0dB)

o Treble Adjust treble. -10dB +10dB (Default : 0dB)

o High Pass Filter Make settings for cutting the low range to reduce distortion in the bass. On: The low range is attenuated. Off (Default): The low range is not attenuated.

o Lch Level Adjust the left channel output level. -12 dB +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

o Rch Level Adjust the right channel output level. -12 dB +12 dB (Default : 0 dB)

o Channel Set whether to playback in stereo or monaural. Stereo (Default): Stereo playback. Mono: Monaural playback.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

263Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o HDMI Audio (ZONE2 only) Selects the audio signal format for playing an HDMI source in ZONE2. Through (Default):

The HDMI audio signal is passed through this unit to the device in ZONE2.

PCM: The HDMI audio signal input into this unit is converted to a PCM signal that can be output from the ZONE2 PRE OUT connectors or speaker terminals.

o Volume Level Set the volume output level. Variable (Default): Volume can be adjusted.

1 98 (79 dB 18 dB):

Volume is fixed at the desired level. The volume cannot be adjusting using the remote control unit.

0 The dB value is displayed when the Scale setting is 79.5 dB 18.0 dB. (v p. 191)

o Volume Limit Make a setting for maximum volume. 60 (-20 dB) / 70 (-10 dB) / 80 (0 dB) (Default : 70 (-10 dB)) Off: Do not set a maximum volume.

0 This can be set when Volume Level is set to Variable. (v p. 264) 0 The dB value is displayed when the Scale setting is 79.5 dB 18.0 dB.

(v p. 191)

o Power On Volume Define the volume setting that is active when the power is turned on. Last (Default):

Use the memorized setting from the last session.

Mute: Always mute when power is turned on. 1 98 (79 dB 18 dB): The volume is adjusted to the set level.

0 This can be set when Volume Level is set to Variable. (v p. 264) 0 The dB value is displayed when the Scale setting is 79.5 dB 18.0 dB.

(v p. 191)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

264Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Mute Level Set the amount of attenuation when muting is on. Full (Default): The sound is muted entirely. -40 dB : The sound is attenuated by 40 dB down. -20 dB : The sound is attenuated by 20 dB down.

Zone Rename Change the display title of each zone to one you prefer. MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3 Set Defaults: The default setting is restored for the edited

zone name.

0 Up to 10 characters can be input.

Quick Select Names Change the quick select name that appears on the TV screen to one you prefer. Quick Select 1 / Quick Select 2 / Quick Select 3 / Quick Select 4 Set Defaults: The default setting is restored for the edited

quick select name.

0 Up to 16 characters can be input.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

265Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Trigger Out 1 / Trigger Out 2 Select the conditions for activating trigger out. For details about how to connect the TRIGGER OUT jacks, see TRIGGER OUT jacks (v p. 98).

n When setting for zone (MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3) Trigger out is activated through linkage to the power of the zone set to On.

n When setting for input source Activate trigger out when the input source set to On is selected.

n When setting for HDMI monitor Activate trigger out when the HDMI monitor set to On is selected.

On: Activate trigger on this mode. : Do not activate trigger on this mode.

Front Display Makes settings related to the display on this unit.

o Dimmer Adjust the display brightness of this unit. Bright (Default): Normal display brightness. Dim: Reduced display brightness. Dark: Very low display brightness. Off: Turns the display off.

0 You can also adjust the display by pressing DIMMER on the main unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

266Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Channel Indicators Sets whether to use the input signal display or output signal display for the channel indication on the display.

Input: Uses the input signal display for the channel indication on the display.

Output (Default):

Uses the output signal display for the channel indication on the display.

Firmware Checks for the latest firmware information about updates and upgrades, updates the firmware, and sets up the notification message display for upgrades.

o Check for Update Check for firmware updates. The firmware can be updated if a firmware update has been released.

Update Now: Execute the update process. When the update starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the update, the progress is shown on the display.

Update Later: Update later.

0 This unit automatically retries updating if updating fails. If an update still cannot be performed, an Update Error message appears in the display. See Troubleshooting Update/upgrade error messages for information on update error messages. (v p. 313) Check the conditions according to the message and try the update again.

0 This menu cannot be selected when Allow Update is set to Off.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

267Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Auto-Update Turns on Automatic Updates so that futures updates are automatically downloaded and installed when this unit is in standby mode.

n Auto-Update This unit will automatically update to the newest firmware when in standby mode. On: Turns on Automatic Updates. Off (Default): Turns off Automatic Updates.

n Time Zone Change the time zone. Set the time zone that matches the area where you live.

0 This menu cannot be selected when Allow Update is set to Off.

o Allow Update Enable or disable updates and upgrades for this unit. On (Default):

Enables this unit to receive updates and upgrades.

Off: Prevents this unit from receiving update and upgrade.

0 This setting causes Incompatibilities between this unit and HEOS App.

o Upgrade Notification When the latest Upgrade firmware is available, a notification message is displayed on the TV screen at power on. The notification message is displayed for about 40 seconds when the power is turned on. On (Default): Display upgrade message. Off: Do not display upgrade message.

0 This menu cannot be selected when Allow Update is set to Off.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

268Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Add New Feature Display new features that can be downloaded to this unit and perform an upgrade. Upgrade Package: Display the items to be upgraded. Upgrade Status: Display a list of the additional functions

provided by the upgrade.

Upgrade:

Execute the upgrade process. When the upgrade starts, the menu screen is shut down. During the upgrade, the amount of upgrade time which has elapsed is displayed.

0 Information regarding the Update function and Add New Feature will be announced on the Denon website each time related plans are defined. See the Denon website for details about upgrades.

0 When the procedure is complete, Registered is displayed in this menu and upgrades can be carried out. If the procedure has not been carried out, Not Registered is displayed. The ID number shown on this screen is needed when carrying out the procedure. The ID number can also be displayed by pressing and holding the main units u and INFO for at least 3 seconds.

0 If the upgrade is not successful, Upgrade Error message appears in the display. See Troubleshooting Update/upgrade error messages for information on upgrade error messages. (v p. 313) Check the settings and network environment and then perform the upgrade again.

0 This menu cannot be selected when Allow Update is set to Off.

Notes concerning use of Update and Add New Feature 0 In order to use these functions, you must have the correct system

requirements and settings for an Internet connection. (v p. 95) 0 Do not turn off the power until updating or upgrading is completed. 0 Approximately 1 hour is required for the updating/upgrading procedure

to be completed. 0 Once updating/upgrade starts, normal operations on this unit cannot

be performed until updating/upgrading is completed. Furthermore, there may be cases where backup data is reset for the parameters, etc., set on this unit.

0 If the update or upgrade fails, press and hold the X on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. After about 1 minute, Please wait appears on the display and update restarts. If the error continues, check the network environment.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

269Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Information Show information about this unit settings, input signals, etc.

o Audio Show the audio information for MAIN ZONE. Sound Mode: The currently set sound mode. Input Signal: The input signal type. Format: The number of input signal channels

(presence of front, surround, LFE). Sample Rate: The input signals sampling frequency. Offset: The dialogue normalization correction

value.

Flag:

This is displayed when inputting signals including a surround back channel. MATRIX is displayed with DTS-ES Matrix input signals, DISCRETE with DTS-ES Discrete signals.

o Video Show the HDMI input/output signals and HDMI monitor information for MAIN ZONE. HDMI Signal Info. Resolution / HDR / Color Space / Pixel Depth / ALLM / QMS / QFT / FRL Rate

HDMI Monitor 1 / HDMI Monitor 2 Interface / HDR / Resolutions / Enhanced Features / Max FRL Rate

0 A or B may be displayed at the end of resolution. A represents uncompressed video and B represents compressed video.

0 Refer to About HDMI for more information about ALLM, QMS, QFT, and FRL. (v p. 319)

o ZONE Show information about current settings.

MAIN ZONE: This item shows information about settings for MAIN ZONE. The information displayed differs according to the input source.

ZONE2/3: This item shows information about settings for ZONE2 and ZONE3.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

270Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Firmware Version: Displays information for the current

firmware. DTS Version: Displays the current DTS version.

o Notifications Displays and sets notifications. Also, sets whether or not to display the notification when the power is turned on. Notification Alerts On (Default): Notification messages are displayed. Off: Notification messages are not displayed.

0 Press INFO on the remote control unit to display current source name, volume, sound mode name, and other information at the bottom of the screen.

.

AUDYSSEY

SIGNAL

EXTLFE

SB SBRSBL

C FR FWR FHR SW

FLFWL FHL

SRSL SBRSBL

C FRFL SRSL

INPUT SIGNAL ACTIVE SPEAKERS

SOUND

SOURCE

Dynamic EQ : On MultEQ XT32 : Reference

Dynamic Volume : Medium

Dolby Audio - Dolby TrueHD

50.0

Dolby Audio - Dolby TrueHD Blu-ray

Press INFO again while the information screen is displayed to display information about video input and output signals. The FRL Rate is displayed when the 4K/8K Signal Format setting of this unit is 8K Enhanced and the connected TV supports FRL transmission mode.

.

Resolution HDR Color Space

Pixel Depth FRL Rate

[Input] 8K24A HDR10 YCbCr 4:2:2 BT.2020 12bits 40Gbps

[Output] 8K24A HDR10 YCbCr 4:2:2 BT.2020 12bits 40Gbps

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

271Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Remote ID Set when you operate another Denon AV amplifier with the remote control unit of this unit. Match the remote control unit you are using with the remote ID of this unit. o Settings

1 Press ZONE SELECT to switch the zone mode. The J indicator lights.

2 Press SETUP. The menu is displayed on the TV screen.

3 Use ui to select General, then press ENTER.

4 Use ui to select Remote ID, then press ENTER.

5 Change the ID for the remote control unit. (v p. 289)

6 Press ENTER. The Remote ID for this unit is set to the same ID as the one for the remote control unit.

Usage Data To help us improve our products and customer service, Denon collects anonymous information about how you use this unit (such as frequently used input sources and sound modes and speaker settings). Denon will never provide any information we collect to third parties.

Yes: Provide information on the operating status of this unit.

No: Do not provide information on the operating status of this unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

272Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Save & Load Save and restore device settings by using a USB memory device.

0 Use a USB memory device that has at least 128 MB of free space and is formatted to FAT32. Data may not Save/Load correctly to some USB memory devices.

0 It may take up to 10 minutes for data to Save/Load. Do not turn off the power until the process is complete.

o Save Configuration Current unit settings are stored on the USB memory device. When the settings are saved correctly, Saved appears on the display and the file config.avr is created on the USB memory device.

0 Do not change the file name of the created file. Doing so will prevent the file from being recognized as a settings file when restoring.

o Load Configuration Settings saved on the USB memory device are restored. When the saved settings are restored correctly, Loaded appears on the display and the unit automatically restarts.

Setup Lock Protect settings from inadvertent changes.

o Lock On: Turn protection on. Off (Default): Turn protection off.

0 When cancelling the setting, set Lock to Off.

NOTE 0 When Lock is set to On, no setting items are displayed except for Setup

Lock.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

273Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating external devices with the remote control unit

.

USB

OPTION

RC SETUP

SETUP

QUICK SELECT 1 4

0 9

MACRO A D

ui ENTER

Input source select buttons

Display

When preset codes are registered in the included remote control unit, it can then be used to operate any devices you have, such as DVD players or TVs made by different manufacturers.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

274Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Registering preset codes There are two methods for registering preset codes; the simple method for registering preset codes of Denon players, and the method for registering the preset numbers of other manufacturers devices. 0 Registering Denon players (v p. 275) 0 Registering by entering preset numbers (v p. 276)

o Registering Denon players Use the following simple method to register the preset codes of Denon Blu-ray Disc players, DVD players and CD players.

n Registering Blu-ray Disc players

1 Press and hold down Blu-ray and OPTION until OK indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then release.

n Registering DVD players

1 Press and hold down DVD and OPTION until OK indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then release.

n Registering CD players

1 Press and hold down CD and OPTION until OK indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then release.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

275Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n Registering multiple players at the same time

1 Press and hold down QUICK SELECT 1 4 and OPTION until OK indicator on the remote control display is flashing, then release.

Devices to be registered at the same time Press and hold down

the buttonsBlu-ray Disc player

DVD player CD player

P P QUICK SELECT 1 and OPTION

P P QUICK SELECT 2 and OPTION

P P

QUICK SELECT 3 and OPTION

P P P QUICK SELECT 4 and OPTION

NOTE 0 Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons

may not operate. In this case, try Registering by entering preset numbers (v p. 276).

o Registering by entering preset numbers The following table shows the device groups that can be registered for each of the input source select buttons. Check the preset number of the device you want to register beforehand in the Remote Control Preset Codes file. http://manuals.denon.com/AVCX8500H/preset/ AVCX8500HPresetCodes.pdf

Button Device groups that can be registered CBL/SAT group

VCR/PVR group, BD/DVD group CBL/SAT group, VCR/PVR group, BD/DVD group, Audio group CBL/SAT group

VCR/PVR group, BD/DVD group CBL/SAT group, VCR/PVR group, BD/DVD group, Audio group CBL/SAT group, VCR/PVR group, BD/DVD group, Audio group Audio group

TV group

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

276Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 When PRSET appears on the remote control unit, press ENTER.

3 When DEVIC appears on the remote control unit, press the input source select button of the AV equipment (CBL/SAT, Blu-ray, GAME, MEDIA PLAYER, DVD, AUX1, AUX2 or CD) that you want to program for the preset setting.

4 When appears on the remote control unit, press the number buttons 0 9 to enter a 5-digit code. Press the buttons with an interval less than 30 seconds. 0 When the code is registered, OK flashes four times on the

remote control unit. 0 When the code is not registered correctly, FAIL or CANCL

flashes four times on the remote control unit. Perform from step 1 again.

0 Some manufacturers use more than one type of preset code. Preset codes to change the number and verify correct operation.

0 To unregister the device from a button and reset to the default setting, set the AVR code 73347 to the button.

NOTE 0 Depending on the model and year of manufacture of your device, some buttons

may not operate.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

277Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating devices To operate an external device, press the input source button registered with the preset code, followed by one of the buttons in the following tables.

0 The input source name is displayed on the remote control unit when an external device is being operated.

0 The TV is displayed on the remote control unit when the TV is being operated. 0 To operate the menu of this unit, press AVR before operating the unit. The AVR

is displayed on the remote control unit when this unit is being operated.

n CBL/SAT group (Set top box for satellite (SAT)/cable TV (CBL)/ Media player/IP TV) operation

Operation buttons Function DEVICE X Power on/off DEVICE MENU Menu CH/PAGE df Switch channels (up/down) INFO Information OPTION Sub menu, Option uiop Cursor operation ENTER(Cursor) Enter BACK Back SETUP Home menu 89 Skip chapter 1 Playback 67 Fast-reverse / Fast-forward 3 Pause 2 Stop 0 9, +10 Channel selection ENTER(Number) 3 digit entry

0 Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs the power-on operation.

USB

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

278Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n TV group (TV) operation

Operation buttons Function TV X TV power on/off TV INPUT Switch TV input TV MENU TV menu CH/PAGE df Switch channels (up/down) INFO Information OPTION Sub menu, Option uiop Cursor operation ENTER(Cursor) Enter BACK Back SETUP Setup 89 Skip chapter 1 Playback 67 Fast-reverse / Fast-forward 3 Pause 2 Stop 0 9, +10 Channel selection ENTER(Number) 3 digit entry

USB

n VCR/PVR group (Video cassette recorder (VCR)/personal video recorder (PVR)) operation

Operation buttons Function DEVICE X Power on/off DEVICE MENU Menu CH/PAGE df Switch channels (up/down) INFO Information OPTION Sub menu, Option uiop Cursor operation ENTER Enter BACK Back SETUP Setup 89 Skip chapter 1 Playback 67 Fast-reverse / Fast-forward 3 Pause 2 Stop 0 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel

selection

USB

0 Depending on the device, the power may not be turned off for the DEVICE X and TV X buttons. 0 TV X and TV INPUT buttons can be operated at any time without pressing the TV button.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

279Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

n BD/DVD group (Blu-ray Disc player/HD-DVD player/DVD player/DVD recorder) operation

Operation buttons Function DEVICE X Power on/off DEVICE MENU (Popup) Menu CH/PAGE df Switch channels (up/down) INFO Information OPTION Top menu uiop Cursor operation ENTER Enter BACK Back SETUP Setup 89 Skip chapter 1 Playback 67 Fast-reverse / Fast-forward 3 Pause 2 Stop 0 9, +10 Select title, chapter or channel

selection

USB

n Audio group (CD player/CD recorder) operation

Operation buttons Function DEVICE X Power on/off INFO Information uiop Cursor operation ENTER Enter 89 Skip track 1 Playback 67 Fast-reverse / Fast-forward 3 Pause 2 Stop 0 9, +10 Track selection

USB

0 Depending on the device, the DEVICE X button only performs the power-on operation. (Depending on the device, some Denon models can only be operated with the power turned on.)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

280Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating learning function If the unit does not operate even when the preset code is registered, use the learning function. Remote codes for different devices can be remembered for use by the Denon remote control included with this unit.

o Remembering remote control codes from other devices

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display LEARN on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 When DEVIC appears on the remote control unit, press the input source select button of the AV equipment that you want to store. 0 You cannot store the remote control code in the AVR button. 0 Before using the learning function, register a preset code for a

mode other than AVR preset to each input source switch button. (Registering preset codes (v p. 275))

4 When KEY appears on the remote control unit, press the button that you want to store.

5 When READY appears on the remote control unit, place the remote control unit of the AV equipment face to face with main remote control unit (of this unit). Next, press and hold down the desired button (that you want to store) of the remote control unit of the AV equipment.

.

0 When the button is correctly stored, OK flashes four times on the remote control unit.

0 If the button is not correctly stored, FAIL flashes four times on the remote control unit. If this happens, perform step 4 again.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

281Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

6 To store another button, repeat steps 4 and 5.

7 When you have finished storing the remote control codes, press RC SETUP. OK flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal operation mode is restored.

0 There are some remote control units that cannot be programmed, or even if they can be programmed, they may not operate correctly. If this happens, use the remote control unit supplied with the AV equipment to operate it.

0 The operations of the programmed buttons override the preset memory. If you do not require the programmed buttons, erase the stored remote control codes to return to the initial settings. (v p. 283)

0 The number of buttons that can be stored varies depending on the remote control unit used. If you have stored the maximum number of buttons allowed for the remote control unit, FAIL appears on its display.

NOTE 0 You cannot store the remote control code in the ZONE SELECT, RC SETUP,

POWER X, QUICK SELECT 1 4, ECO, SOUND MODE, SLEEP, MACRO A D and input source select button.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

282Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Erasing stored remote control codes n Erasing the code by each button

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display RESET on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 When LEARN appears on the remote control unit, press ENTER.

4 When DEVIC appears on the remote control unit, press the input source select button of the AV equipment that you want to erase.

5 Use ui to display ONE on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

6 When KEY appears on the remote control unit, press the button that you want to erase. RESET flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal operation mode is restored.

n Erasing the code by each equipment input source

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display RESET on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 When LEARN appears on the remote control unit, press ENTER.

4 When DEVIC appears on the remote control unit, press the input source select button of the AV equipment that you want to erase.

5 When ALL appears, press ENTER. RESET flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal operation mode is restored.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

283Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operating macro function 0 When the macro function is used, operations that usually require a

complicated series of multiple button operations can be performed easily just by pressing the MACRO button.

0 This unit can remember up to 4 macro functions. 0 Each macro can record a maximum of 18 steps. G Example H When the following set of operations has been registered to the MACRO button, you can simply press the MACRO button to turn on the TV and this unit and start playing back Blu-ray Disc player. A Turn the TVs power on.

$ B Turn this units power on.

$ C Switch this units input source to Blu-ray.

$ D Turn the Blu-ray Disc players power on.

$ E Play the Blu-ray Disc player.

o Recording automatic macro operations You can automatically set the macro for your scene. 1. Watch movies (MOVIE) 2. Listen to music (MUSIC) 3. Watch TV (CBL/SAT) (WATCH) 4. Turn on all devices (ON) 5. Turn off all devices (OFF)

NOTE 0 Register preset codes for the remote control unit before setting Auto macro.

(v p. 275) 0 Depending on the type or model of your device, macro may not work properly

even if it is set.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

284Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display MACRO on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 Use ui to display AUTO on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

4 When MCNo appears on the remote control unit, press the MACRO A D button that you want to set.

5 Use ui to set the auto macro operation and press ENTER. OK flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal operation mode is restored.

Remote control unit display Auto MACRO

MOVIE Automatically turns on the devices and starts playback when you watch movies. TV power ON

Blu-ray power ON AVR Power ON Source Change Blu-ray Playback Blu-ray Disc

MUSIC Automatically turns on the devices and starts playback when you listen to music. CD power ON

AVR Power ON Source Change CD Playback CD

WATCH Automatically turns on the devices and starts playback when you watch TV (CBL/SAT). TV power ON

CBL/SAT Power ON AVR Power ON Source Change CBL/SAT

ON Turns on all the devices set for PRESET. All device power on

OFF Turns off all the devices set for PRESET. All device power off

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

285Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Recording custom macro operations

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display MACRO on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 Use ui to display MAN on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

4 When MCNo appears on the remote control unit, press the MACRO A D button that you want to set.

5 Press the buttons to be stored one by one. The step number for the storing procedure and mode are alternately displayed on the remote control unit.

NOTE 0 You cannot store the macros for the ZONE SELECT button.

6 Press RC SETUP to exit the macro function. OK flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal operation mode is restored.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

286Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Adjusting the interval time of macro operations transmitting The macro operation transmission interval can be adjusted. 0 The default setting is 0.50.

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display MACRO on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 Use ui to display MAN on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

4 When MCNo appears on the remote control unit, press the MACRO A D button that you want to set.

5 Press RC SETUP.

6 Use ui to set the macro operation transmission interval and press ENTER. OK flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal operation mode is restored.

Remote control unit display Time values that you can set

0.25 0.25 sec 0.50 0.5 sec 0.75 0.75 sec 1.00 1 sec 1.25 1.25 sec

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

287Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Using the macro function Press the MACRO A D button you used to store the macro function.

o Resetting the macro function

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display RESET on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 Use ui to display MACRO on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

4 When MCNo appears on the remote control unit, press the MACRO A D button that you want to reset. RESET flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal operation mode is restored.

Specifying the zone used with the remote control unit

When the ZONE SELECT button is pressed, only the set zone can be operated with the remote control unit. 0 The default setting is M23.

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display ZLOCK on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 Use ui to set the zone to be used and press ENTER. OK flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal operation mode is restored.

Remote control unit display Zone to be used

M MAIN ZONE only M2 MAIN ZONE / ZONE2

M23 MAIN ZONE / ZONE2 / ZONE3

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

288Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting the Remote ID When using multiple Denon AV receivers in the same room, make this setting so that only the desired AV receiver operates. 0 The default setting is ID-1.

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display RC-ID on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 Use ui to set the remote ID and press ENTER. OK flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal operation mode is restored.

Remote control unit display Remote ID ID-1 1 ID-2 2 ID-3 3 ID-4 4

NOTE 0 When you change the remote ID, make sure that the remote control unit and the

remote ID of the main unit are exactly the same. (v p. 272)

Setting the display time length of the remote control unit display

Use the following procedure to set the length of time for which to display data such as zone and mode on the display panel of the remote control unit. 0 The default setting is 05SEC.

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display DISPL on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 Use ui to set the display time length and press ENTER. OK flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal operation mode is restored.

Remote control unit display Display time 05SEC 5 sec 10SEC 10 sec 15SEC 15 sec

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

289Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Setting the back light You can set the back light on the remote control unit to off to prolong the life of the dry cell batteries. 0 The default setting is ON.

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display LIGHT on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 Use ui to set the back light and press ENTER. Remote control unit display Back light

ON Back light on OFF Back light off

Restoring all settings of the remote control unit to default

All the settings are restored to their defaults.

1 Press and hold RC SETUP for more than 3 seconds. SETUP and p indicator flashes twice on the remote control unit.

2 Use ui to display RESET on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

3 Use ui to display ALL on the remote control unit and press ENTER.

4 Use ui to display YES on the remote control unit and press ENTER. RESET flashes four times on the remote control unit and the normal operation mode is restored.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

290Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Contents

Tips I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 292 I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 292 I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 292 I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 292 I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level 292 I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies 292 I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new one 293 I want to combine a desired video with the current music 293 I want to skip unused input sources 293 I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 293 I want to minimize the delay in video signals when Im playing a game on my game console 293 I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control 293

Troubleshooting Power does not turn on / Power is turned off 295 Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit 296 Display on this unit shows nothing 296 No sound comes out 297 Desired sound does not come out 298 Sound is interrupted or noise occurs 301 No video is shown on the TV 302 The menu screen is not displayed on the TV 304 The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal 304 AirPlay cannot be played back 305 USB memory devices cannot be played back 306 Bluetooth cannot be played back 307 The Internet radio cannot be played back 308 Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back 309 Various online services cannot be played 310 The HDMI Control function does not work 310 Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network 311 When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly 312 Update/upgrade error messages 313

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

291Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Tips I want the volume not to become too loud by mistake 0 Set the volume upper limit for Volume Limit in the menu beforehand. This prevents children or others from increasing the volume too much by mistake.

You can set this for each zone. (Volume (v p. 191), Volume Limit (v p. 264)) I want to keep the volume at the same level when I turn the power on 0 By default, the volume setting when power was previously set to standby on this unit is applied at next power on with no change. To use a fixed volume

level, set the volume level at power on for Power On Volume in the menu. You can set this for each zone. (Volume (v p. 191), Power On Volume (v p. 264))

I want to have the subwoofer always output audio 0 Depending on the input signals and sound mode, the subwoofer may not output audio. When Subwoofer Mode in the menu is set to LFE+Main, you

can have the subwoofer always output audio. (v p. 247) I want to make human voices in the movies clearer 0 Select a setting that makes the dialog easier to hear in the option menu Dialog Enhancer. (v p. 133) I want to keep bass and clarity during playback at a lower volume level 0 Set Dynamic EQ in the menu to On. This setting corrects the frequency characteristics to allow you to enjoy clear sound without the bass being lost

even during playback at a lower volume level. (v p. 193) I want to automatically adjust the volume level difference in content such as TV and movies 0 Set Dynamic Volume in the menu. Volume level changes (between quiet scenes and loud scenes) in TV shows or movies are automatically adjusted

to your desired level. (v p. 194)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

292Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

I want to set the optimized listening environment after changing the configuration/position of the speakers or changing a speaker to a new one 0 Perform Audyssey Setup. This automatically makes the optimized speaker settings for the new listening environment. (v p. 217) I want to combine a desired video with the current music 0 Set Video Select in the option menu to On. You can combine the current music with your desired video source from a Set-top Box or DVD, etc. while

listening to music from the CD, Phono, HEOS Music, USB or Bluetooth. (v p. 136) I want to skip unused input sources 0 Set unused input sources for Hide Sources in the menu. This allows you to skip unused input sources when turning the SOURCE SELECT knob on

this unit. (v p. 215) I want to enjoy the same music in all zones at the home party, etc. 0 Set All Zone Stereo in the option menu to Start. You can simultaneously play back music in another room (ZONE2, ZONE3) that is played back in

MAIN ZONE. (v p. 138) I want to minimize the delay in video signals when Im playing a game on my game console 0 When the video is delayed against button operations with the controller on the game console, set Video Mode in the menu to Game. (v p. 205) I want to operate this unit using the TV remote control 0 Select AV Receiver in a TV menu such as Inputz or Operate Connected HDMI Devicez. The Smart Menu of this unit is displayed on the TV. This

Smart Menu can be operated using the remote control of your TV. zThe selection method differs depending on your TV. See the owner's manual of your TV for details.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

293Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Troubleshooting If a problem should arise, first check the following: 1. Are the connections correct? 2. Is the set being operated as described in the owners manual? 3. Are the other devices operating properly?

0 If steps 1 to 3 above do not improve the problem, restarting the device may improve the problem. Continue pressing the X button on the unit until Restart appears in the display, or remove and re-insert the power cord of the unit.

If this unit does not operate properly, check the corresponding symptoms in this section. If the symptoms do not match any of those described here, consult your dealer as it could be due to a fault in this unit. In this case, disconnect the power immediately and contact the store where you purchased this unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

294Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Power does not turn on / Power is turned off Power does not turn on. 0 Check whether the power plug is correctly inserted into the power outlet. (v p. 99) Power automatically turns off. 0 The sleep timer is set. Turn on the power again. (v p. 158) 0 Auto Standby is set. Auto Standby is triggered when there is no operation for a set amount of time. To disable Auto Standby, set Auto Standby on

the menu to Off. (v p. 262) Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 2 seconds. 0 The protection circuit has been activated due to a rise in temperature within this unit. Turn the power off, wait about an hour until this unit cools down

sufficiently, and then turn the power on again. (v p. 336) 0 Please re-install this unit in a place having good ventilation. Power turns off and the power indicator flashes in red approx. every 0.5 seconds. 0 Check the speaker connections. The protection circuit may have been activated because speaker cable core wires came in contact with each other or a

core wire was disconnected from the connector and came in contact with the rear panel of this unit. After unplugging the power cord, take corrective action such as firmly re-twisting the core wire or taking care of the connector, and then reconnect the wire. (v p. 42)

0 Turn down the volume and turn on the power again. (v p. 101) 0 This units amplifier circuit has failed. Unplug the power cord and contact our customer service center. The power to this unit does not turn off when you press the Power operation button. ZONE2 On or ZONE3 On appears on the display. 0 Power in either ZONE2 or ZONE3 is on. To turn off the power of the device (standby), press either the ZONE2 ON/OFF or ZONE3 ON/OFF button on

the main unit or press the ZONE SELECT button on the remote control and select a zone before pressing the POWER X button. The power to this unit does not turn off when you press the Power operation button. HEOS On appears on the display. 0 A HEOS device on the same network is playing an input source from this unit. Stop playback on the HEOS device when turning this unit off (setting it to

standby). The power of this unit will turn off automatically after around 20 minutes.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

295Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit Operations cannot be performed through the remote control unit. 0 Batteries are worn out. Replace with new batteries. (v p. 9) 0 Operate the remote control unit within a distance of about 7 m from this unit and at an angle of within 30. (v p. 9) 0 Remove any obstacle between this unit and the remote control unit. 0 Insert the batteries in the proper direction, checking the q and w marks. (v p. 9) 0 The sets remote control sensor is exposed to strong light (direct sunlight, inverter type fluorescent bulb light, etc.). Move the set to a place in which the

remote control sensor will not be exposed to strong light. 0 The operation target zone does not correspond to the zone setting specified on the remote control unit. Press ZONE SELECT to select the zone to

operate. (v p. 179) 0 The remote control unit operating mode is used to operate other devices. Press AVR to set the operating mode to AVR. (v p. 278) 0 When using a 3D video device, the remote control unit of this unit may not function due to effects of infrared communications between units (such as TV

and glasses for 3D viewing). In this case, adjust the direction of units with the 3D communications function and their distance to ensure they do not affect operations from the remote control unit of this unit.

Display on this unit shows nothing Display is off. 0 Set Dimmer on the menu to something other than Off. (v p. 266) 0 When the sound mode is set to Pure Direct, the display is off. (v p. 142)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

296Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

No sound comes out No sound comes out of speakers. 0 Check the connections for all devices. (v p. 42) 0 Insert connection cables all the way in. 0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. 0 Check cables for damage. 0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected. Check that cable core wires come in contact with the metal part on speaker terminals. (v p. 42) 0 Securely tighten the speaker terminals. Check speaker terminals for looseness. (v p. 42) 0 Check that a proper input source is selected. (v p. 101) 0 Adjust the volume. (v p. 102) 0 Cancel the mute mode. (v p. 102) 0 Check the digital audio input connector setting. (v p. 212) 0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, the digital audio output is set to off by default. 0 When a headphone is plugged into the PHONES jack on the main unit, sound is not output from the speaker terminal and PRE OUT connector. No sound comes out when using the DVI-D connection. 0 When this unit is connected to a device equipped with a DVI-D connector, no sound is output. Make a separate audio connection. No sound comes out of a TV that is connected via HDMI. 0 Audio signals input to 7.1CH IN connectors on this unit cannot be output to the TV. No sound comes out when selecting Tuner input. 0 This unit does not have built-in FM/AM tuner. Connect an external tuner to the TUNER inputs.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

297Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Desired sound does not come out The volume does not increase. 0 The maximum volume is set too low. Set the maximum volume using Limit on the menu. (v p. 191) 0 Appropriate volume correction processing is performed according to the input audio format and settings, so the volume may not reach the upper limit. No sound comes out with the HDMI connection. 0 Check the connection of the HDMI connectors. (v p. 83) 0 When outputting HDMI audio from the speakers, set HDMI Audio Out on the menu to AVR. To output from the TV, set TV. (v p. 199) 0 When using the HDMI Control function, check that the audio output is set to the AV amplifier on the TV. (v p. 155) When an eARC function-compatible television is connected, television audio is not output from the speaker connected to this unit 0 eARC function settings may be required depending on the eARC function-compatible television you are using. Make sure eARC is set to on if this

setting exists on your television. For more information, check your televisions owners manual. 0 Make sure the input source of this unit is TV Audio. 0 The eARC function does not operate when the HDMI input connector is set to the TV Audio input source. To enable eARC function operation, remove

the HDMI input connector setting, then restart this unit and the television. (v p. 213) No sound comes out of a specific speaker. 0 Check that speaker cables are properly connected. 0 Check that a selection other than None is set for the Speaker Config. setting in menu. (v p. 238) 0 Check the Assign Mode setting in the menu. (v p. 228) 0 When the sound mode is Stereo and Virtual, audio is only output from the front speakers and subwoofer. 0 Audio is not output from the surround back speaker if Speaker Virtualizer is set to On when Speaker Config. - Surr. Back is set to 1 spkr in the

menu. (v p. 183) 0 Audio is not output from the front wide speaker if Speaker Virtualizer is set to On. (v p. 183) 0 When Speaker Config. - Surr. Back is set to 2 spkrs, Speaker Config. - Center is set to Large or Small, and sound mode is set to IMAX

DTS, surround audio is output from the surround back speaker. Audio is not output from the surround speaker. (v p. 239)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

298Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

No sound is produced from subwoofer. 0 Check the subwoofer connections. 0 Turn on the subwoofers power. 0 Set Speaker Config. - Subwoofer in the menu to 1 spkr or 2 spkrs. (v p. 238) 0 When Speaker Config. - Front in the menu is set to Large, depending on the input signal and the sound mode, no sound may be output from the

subwoofer. (v p. 238) 0 When no subwoofer audio signal (LFE) is included in the input signals, no sound may be output from the subwoofer. (v p. 247) 0 You can make the subwoofer always output sound by setting the Subwoofer Mode to LFE+Main. (v p. 247) DTS sound is not output. 0 Check that the digital audio output setting on the connected device is set to DTS. Dolby Atmos, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, Dolby Digital Plus audio is not output. 0 Make HDMI connections. (v p. 87) 0 Check the digital audio output setting on the connected device. On some devices, PCM is set by default. DTS Neural:X mode cannot be selected. 0 DTS Neural:X cannot be selected when using the headphones. Dolby Surround mode cannot be selected. 0 Dolby Surround cannot be selected when using the headphones. IMAX DTS:X cannot be selected. 0 IMAX DTS:X and IMAX DTS cannot be selected but DTS:X and DTS can be selected, when the headphones are used. Sound modes other than Stereo or Direct cannot be selected. 0 Only Stereo or Direct can be selected for the sound mode if Headphone:X signals are input.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

299Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Audyssey MultEQ XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ, Audyssey Dynamic Volume and Audyssey LFC cannot be selected. 0 These cannot be selected when you have not performed Audyssey Setup. (v p. 217) 0 Switch to a sound mode other than Direct or Pure Direct. (v p. 141) 0 Audyssey Dynamic EQ, Audyssey Dynamic Volume and Audyssey LFC cannot be selected when sound mode is DTS Virtual:X or sound mode

that have + Virtual:X in the sound mode name. 0 These cannot be selected when using the headphones. Restorer cannot be selected. 0 Check that an analog signal or PCM signal (Sample Rate = 44.1/48 kHz) is input. For playback of multichannel signals such as Dolby Digital or DTS

surround, Restorer cannot be used. (v p. 189) 0 Switch to a sound mode other than Direct or Pure Direct. (v p. 141) No audio is output from PRE OUT or speakers for ZONE2/ZONE3. 0 In ZONE2/ZONE3, the audio can be played back when signals input from digital connectors (OPTICAL/COAXIAL) are in 2ch PCM format. 0 In ZONE2, the audio can be played back when signals input from the HDMI connector are in 2ch PCM format. To play back the audio in ZONE2

irrespective of the input signal format, set HDMI Audio in the menu to PCM. Depending on the played back device, the audio may not be played back even with this setting. In that case, set the audio format to PCM (2ch) on the played back device. (v p. 264)

0 When listening to audio from a Bluetooth device in ZONE2/ZONE3, remove any obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit and use it within a range of about 30 m.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

300Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Sound is interrupted or noise occurs During playback from the Internet radio or USB memory device, sound is occasionally interrupted. 0 When the transfer speed of the USB memory device is slow, sound may occasionally be interrupted. 0 The network communication speed is slow or the radio station is busy. When making a call on iPhone, noise occurs in audio output on this unit. 0 When making a call, keep a distance of 20 cm or longer between iPhone and this unit. The sounds appear to be distorted. 0 Lower the volume. (v p. 102) 0 Set Off to the ECO Mode. When On or Auto is in the ECO Mode, the audio may by distorted when the playback volume is high. (v p. 259) Sound cuts out when using Wi-Fi connection. 0 The frequency band used by the wireless LAN is also used by microwave ovens, cordless telephones, wireless game controllers and other wireless

LAN devices. Using such devices at the same time as this unit may cause sound to cut out due to electronic interference. Sound cut out can be improved using the following methods. (v p. 95) - Install devices that cause interference away from this unit. - Turn off the power supply to devices that cause interference. - Change the settings of the router channel to which this unit is connected to. (See the instruction manual of the wireless router for details on how to change the channel.) - Switch to a wired LAN connection.

0 Particularly when you play back large music files, depending on your wireless LAN environment, the playback sound may be interrupted. In this case, make the wired LAN connection. (v p. 252)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

301Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

No video is shown on the TV No picture appears. 0 Check the connections for all devices. (v p. 83) 0 Insert connection cables all the way in. 0 Check that input connectors and output connectors are not reversely connected. 0 Check cables for damage. 0 Match the input settings to the input connector of the TV connected to this unit. (v p. 212) 0 Check that the proper input source is selected. (v p. 101) 0 Check the video input connector setting. (v p. 212) 0 Check that the resolution of the player corresponds to that of the TV. (v p. 270) 0 Check whether the TV is compatible with copyright protection (HDCP). If connected to a device not compatible with HDCP, video will not be output

correctly. (v p. 320) 0 To enjoy content that is copyright protected by HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3, use a playback device and TV compatible with HDCP 2.2 or HDCP 2.3. 0 The HDMI signal cannot be converted to an analog signal. Use analog connections. (v p. 321) 0 To play back a 4K video, use a High Speed HDMI Cable or an High Speed HDMI Cable with Ethernet. In order to achieve a higher fidelity for 4K

videos, it is recommended to use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cables or an Premium High Speed HDMI Cables with Ethernet that has an HDMI Premium Certified Cable label on the product package.

0 Use an Ultra High Speed 48 Gbps HDMI cable to enjoy 8K or 4K 120Hz video. No video is shown on the TV with the DVI-D connection. 0 With the DVI-D connection, on some device combinations, devices may not function properly due to the copy guard copyright protection (HDCP).

(v p. 320)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

302Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

No video from an input source such as a game console is shown on the TV. 0 When special video signals are input from a game console, etc., the Video Conversion function may not function. Connect the input connector to the

monitor output connector of the same type. While the menu is being displayed, no video is shown on the TV. 0 The video being played will not appear in the background of the menu when the menu is operated during playback of the following video signals.

- Some images of 3D video contents - Computer resolution images (example: VGA) - Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3 - 4K or 8K video - Some kind of HDR signals - Some kind of game contents - Compressed video

When using HDMI ZONE2, the video output in MAIN ZONE is interrupted. 0 When ZONE2 is operated with the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, video in MAIN ZONE may be interrupted.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

303Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

The menu screen is not displayed on the TV The menu screen or status information screen is not displayed on the TV. 0 The menu screen is only displayed on this unit and a TV connected with an HDMI cable. If this unit is connected to a TV using a different video output

connector, operate while watching the display on this unit. 0 The status information will not appear on the TV when the following video signals are being played.

- Some images of 3D video content - Computer resolution images (example: VGA) - Video with an aspect ratio other than 16:9 or 4:3 - Some kind of HDR signals - Some kind of game contents - Compressed video

0 When a 2D video is converted to a 3D video on the TV, the menu screen or status information screen is not displayed properly. (v p. 271) 0 In the pure direct playback mode, the menu screen or status information is not displayed. Switch to a sound mode other than the pure direct mode.

(v p. 140) 0 Set the TV Format setting in the menu to a selection that is appropriate for the TV. (v p. 211)

The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different from normal

The color of the menu screen and operations content displayed on the television is different. 0 Performing operations on this unit during playback of a Dolby Vision signal may cause variance in the color display of the menu screen and operations

content. This is a characteristic of the Dolby Vision signal and is not a malfunction.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

304Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

AirPlay cannot be played back The AirPlay icon is not displayed on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad. 0 This unit and PC / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad are not connected to the same network (LAN). Connect it to the same LAN as this unit. (v p. 95) 0 The firmware on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is not compatible with AirPlay. Update the firmware to the latest version. Audio is not output. 0 The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is set to the minimum level. The volume on iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad is linked with the

volume on this unit. Set a proper volume level. 0 The AirPlay playback is not performed, or this unit is not selected. Click the AirPlay icon on the iTunes / iPhone / iPod touch / iPad screen and select this

unit. (v p. 128) Audio is interrupted during the AirPlay playback on iPhone / iPod touch / iPad. 0 Quit the application running in the background of the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad, and then play using AirPlay. 0 Some external factors may be affecting the wireless connection. Modify the network environment by taking measures such as shortening the distance

from the wireless LAN access point. iTunes cannot be played back through the remote control unit. 0 Enable the Allow iTunes audio control from remote speakers setting on iTunes. Then, you can perform playback, pause, and skip operations through

the remote control unit.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

305Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

USB memory devices cannot be played back USB memory device is not recognized. 0 Disconnect and reconnect the USB memory device. (v p. 94) 0 Mass storage class compatible USB memory devices are supported. 0 This unit does not support a connection through a USB hub. Connect the USB memory device directly to the USB port. 0 The USB memory device must be formatted to FAT32 or NTFS. 0 Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work. Some USB memory devices are not recognized. When using a type of portable hard disc drive

compatible with the USB connection that requires power from an AC adapter, use the AC adapter that came with the drive. Files on the USB memory device are not displayed. 0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (v p. 103) 0 This unit is able to display files in a maximum of eight folder layers. A maximum of 5000 files (folders) can also be displayed for each layer. Modify the

folder structure of the USB memory device. 0 When multiple partitions exist on the USB memory device, only files on the first partition are displayed. iOS and Android devices are not recognized. 0 The USB port of this unit does not support playback from iOS and Android devices. Files on a USB memory device cannot be played. 0 Files are created in a format that is not supported by this unit. Check the formats supported by this unit. (v p. 323) 0 You are attempting to play a file that is copyright protected. Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit. 0 Playback may not be possible if the album art file size exceeds 2 MB.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

306Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Bluetooth cannot be played back Bluetooth devices cannot be connected to this unit. 0 The Bluetooth function in the Bluetooth device has not been enabled. See the Owners Manual of the Bluetooth device to enable the Bluetooth function. 0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. 0 The Bluetooth device cannot connect with this unit if it is not compatible with the A2DP profile. 0 Turn the power of the Bluetooth device off and on again, and then try again. The sound is cut off. 0 Bring the Bluetooth device near to this unit. 0 Remove obstructions between the Bluetooth device and this unit. 0 To prevent electromagnetic interference, locate this unit away from microwave ovens, wireless LAN devices and other Bluetooth devices. 0 Reconnect the Bluetooth device.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

307Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

The Internet radio cannot be played back A list of broadcasting stations is not displayed. 0 The LAN cable is not properly connected, or the network is disconnected. Check the connection status. (v p. 95) 0 Perform the network diagnostic mode. Internet Radio cannot be played. 0 The selected radio station is broadcasting in a format that is not supported by this unit. Formats that can be played back in this unit are MP3, WMA and

AAC. (v p. 326) 0 The firewall function is enabled on the router. Check the firewall setting. 0 The IP address is not properly set. (v p. 254) 0 Check the power of the router is on. 0 To obtain the IP address automatically, enable the DHCP server function on the router. Also, set the DHCP setting to On on this unit. (v p. 254) 0 To obtain the IP address manually, set the IP address on this unit. (v p. 254) 0 Some radio stations broadcast silently during some time period. In this case, no audio is output. Wait for a while and select the same radio station, or

select another radio station. (v p. 113) 0 The selected radio station is not in service. Select a radio station in service. Cannot connect to favorite radio stations. 0 Radio station is not currently in service. Register radio stations in service.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

308Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Music files on PC or NAS cannot be played back Files stored on a computer cannot be played. 0 Files are stored in a non-compatible format. Record in a compatible format. (v p. 325) 0 Files that are copyright protected cannot be played on this unit. 0 The USB port of this unit cannot be used for connection to a computer. 0 Media sharing settings on the server or NAS do not allow this unit. Change the settings to allow this unit. For details, see the owners manual of the

server or NAS. Server is not found, or it is not possible to connect to the server. 0 The computers or routers firewall is activated. Check the computers or routers firewall settings. 0 Computers power is not turned on. Turn on the power. 0 Server is not running. Launch the server. 0 IP address of this unit is wrong. Check the IP address of this unit. (v p. 251) Music files on PC cannot be played back. 0 Even if PC is connected to the USB port on this unit, music files on it cannot be played back. Connect PC to this unit through the network. (v p. 95) Files on PC or NAS are not displayed. 0 Files of a type not supported by this unit are not displayed. (v p. 325) Music stored on a NAS cannot be played. 0 If you use a NAS in conformity with the DLNA standard, enable the DLNA server function in the NAS setting. 0 If you use a NAS that does not conform with the DLNA standard, play the music via a PC. Set Windows Media Players media sharing function and add

NAS to the selected play folder. 0 If connection is restricted, set audio equipment as the connection target.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

309Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Various online services cannot be played Various online services cannot be played. 0 The online service may have been discontinued.

The HDMI Control function does not work The HDMI Control function does not work. 0 Check that HDMI Control in the menu is set to On. (v p. 201) 0 You cannot operate devices that are not compatible with the HDMI Control function. In addition, depending on the connected device or the settings, the

HDMI Control function may not work. In this case, operate the external device directly. (v p. 155) 0 Check that the HDMI Control function setting is enabled on all devices connected to this unit. (v p. 155) 0 When you make connection related changes such as connecting an additional HDMI device, the link operation settings may be initialized. Turn off this

unit and devices connected via HDMI, and turn them on again. (v p. 155) 0 The HDMI MONITOR 2 connector is not compatible with the HDMI Control function. Use the HDMI MONITOR 1 connector to connect to the TV.

(v p. 83)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

310Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Cannot connect to a wireless LAN network Cannot connect to the network. 0 The network name (SSID), password and encryption setting have not been set up correctly. Configure the network settings according to the setting

details of this unit. (v p. 253) 0 Shorten the distance from the wireless LAN access point and remove any obstructions to improve access first before re-connecting again. Place the

unit away from microwave ovens and other network access points. 0 Configure the access point channel settings away from channels that are being used by other networks. 0 This unit is not compatible with WEP (TSN). Cannot connect to a WPS Router. 0 Check that the WPS mode of the router is operating. 0 Press the WPS button on the router and then press the Connect button displayed on the TV within 2 minutes. 0 A router/settings that are compatible with WPS 2.0 standards are required. Set the encryption time to None, WPA-PSK (AES) or WPA2-PSK (AES).

(v p. 253) 0 If the router encryption method is WEP/WPA-TKIP/WPA2-TKIP, you cannot connect by using the WPS button on the router. In this case, use the Scan

Networks or Manual method to connect. Cannot connect to the network using iPhone/iPod touch/iPad. 0 Update the iPhone/iPod touch/iPad firmware to the latest version. 0 When configuring the settings via a wireless connection, iOS 7 or later needs to be supported.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

311Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

When using HDMI ZONE2, the devices does not function properly When using MAIN ZONE, video output is interrupted in HDMI ZONE2. 0 With the same input source selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, when you operate MAIN ZONE, video may be interrupted in HDMI ZONE2. When using HDMI ZONE2, no video or audio is output from the TV in ZONE2. 0 Check that the power is on for ZONE2. (v p. 173) 0 Check the input source for ZONE2. (v p. 173) 0 The AUX1-HDMI and HDMI 7 connector does not support the HDMI ZONE2 function. 0 In ZONE2, playback is only possible when the input signals are HDMI signals. 0 When the TV does not support the input audio format, audio is not output. Set the audio format to PCM on the playback device. Alternatively, set

ZONE2 Setup - HDMI Audio in the menu to PCM. (v p. 264) 0 When the TV is not compatible with the resolution of the input video, no video is output. Set the output resolution on the playback device to a resolution

that is compatible with the TV. When using HDMI ZONE2, MAIN ZONE audio is played back as PCM. 0 When the same input source is selected for MAIN ZONE and ZONE2, the audio format is limited according to the specifications of the TV in ZONE2.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

312Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Update/upgrade error messages If an update/upgrade is interrupted or fails, an error message appears.

Display Description Connection failed. Please check your network, then try again.

The network connection is unstable. Connection to the server failed. Check your network environment and try the update again.

Update failed. Please check your network, then try again.

The download of the firmware failed. Check your network environment and try the update again.

Upgrade failed. Please check your network, then try again.

The download of the firmware failed. Check your network environment and try the upgrade again.

Please check your network, unplug and reconnect the power cord, and try again.

The update failed. Press and hold the X on the main unit for more than 5 seconds, or remove and re-insert the power cord. The update restarts automatically.

Please contact customer service in your area. This unit may be broken. Contact our Customer Service Center in your area.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

313Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Resetting factory settings If the indicators are incorrect or the unit cannot be operated, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the unit before returning the settings to the default settings. (v p. 294) If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below. Various settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again.

.

X

BACK

INFO 1 Turn off the power using X.

2 Press X while simultaneously pressing INFO and BACK.

3 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when Initialized appears on the display.

0 Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the Save & Load function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (v p. 273)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

314Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Resetting network settings If network contents cannot be played or the unit cannot connect to the network, restarting the unit may improve the problem. We recommend restarting the unit before returning the settings to the default settings. (v p. 294) If the operations are not improved by restarting the unit, follow the steps below. Network settings are reset to the factory default values. Make settings again. However, the menu Amp Assign, Speaker Config. and Video settings are not reset.

.

SOURCE SELECT DIMMER

pX

1 Press X to turn on power to the unit.

2 Turn SOURCE SELECT to select HEOS Music.

3 Press and hold the main unit's DIMMER and p at the same time for at least 3 seconds.

4 Remove your fingers from the two buttons when Network Reset... appears on the display.

5 Completed is shown in the display when reset is complete.

0 Before returning the settings to the default settings, use the Save & Load function from the menu to save and restore the details of various settings configured on the unit. (v p. 273)

NOTE 0 Do not turn the power off until reset is complete.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

315Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Restoring the firmware to the factory defaults When the unit or the network functions do not work properly, operation may be improved by restoring the firmware to the factory defaults. Do this when the unit still does not work properly even after trying the steps for Resetting factory settings or Resetting network settings. (v p. 314, 315) After the firmware is restored, various settings are reset to the default settings. Configure the settings and update the firmware again.

.

DIMMER

SETUPX

1 Press X while simultaneously pressing SETUP and DIMMER.

2 When Restoring FW... appears on the display, release the buttons. When the firmware restore is complete, Completed appears on the display for about 5 seconds, and the unit automatically restarts.

0 This operation takes time because it requires reconnecting to the network, restoring and updating the firmware.

0 If this operation does not improve the problem, contact our customer service center.

NOTE 0 Do not turn off the power until the firmware restore is complete.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

316Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

About HDMI HDMI is an abbreviation of High-Definition Multimedia Interface, which is an AV digital interface that can be connected to a TV or amplifier. With the HDMI connection, high definition video and high quality audio formats adopted by Blu-ray Disc players (Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio) can be transmitted, which is not possible with the analog video transmission. Furthermore, in the HDMI connection, audio and video signals can be transmitted through a single HDMI cable, while in conventional connections it is necessary to provide audio and video cables separately for connection between devices. This allows you to simplify the wiring configuration that tends to be quite complex in a home theater system. This unit supports the following HDMI functions. 0 Deep Color

An imaging technology supported by HDMI. Unlike RGB or YCbCr, which uses 8 bits (256 shades) per color, it can use 10 bits (1024 shades), 12 bits (4096 shades), or 16 bits (65536 shades) to produce colors in higher definition. Both devices linked via HDMI must support Deep Color.

0 x.v.Color This function lets HDTVs display colors more accurately. It enables display with natural, vivid colors. x.v.Color is trademark of Sony Corporation.

0 3D This unit supports input and output of 3D (3 dimensional) video signals of HDMI. To play back 3D video, you need a TV and player that provide support for the HDMI 3D function and a pair of 3D glasses.

0 4K / 8K This unit supports input and output of 4K (3840 x 2160 pixels) and 8K (7680 x 4320 pixels) video signals of HDMI.

0 Content Type It automatically makes settings suitable for the video output type (content information).

0 Adobe RGB color, Adobe YCC601 color The color space defined by Adobe Systems Inc. Because it is a wider color space than RGB, it can produce more vivid and natural images.

0 sYCC601 color Each of these color spaces defines a palette of available colors that is larger than the traditional RGB color model.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

317Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 Auto Lip Sync This function can automatically correct delay between the audio and video. Use a TV that is compatible with the Auto Lip Sync function.

0 HDMI Pass Through Even when the power to this unit is set to standby, signals input from the HDMI input connector are output to a TV or other device that is connected to the HDMI output connector.

0 HDMI Control If you connect the unit and an HDMI Control function compatible TV or player with an HDMI cable and then enable the HDMI Control function setting on each device, the devices will be able to control each other. 0 Power off link

This unit power off can be linked to the TV power off step. 0 Audio output destination switching

From the TV, you can switch whether to output audio from the TV or the AV amplifier.

0 Volume adjustment You can adjust this units volume in the TV volume adjustment operation.

0 Input source switching You can switch this unit input sources through linkage to TV input switching. When playing the player, this unit input source switches to the source for that player.

0 ARC (Audio Return Channel) This function transmits audio signals from the TV to this unit through the HDMI cable and plays back the audio from the TV on this unit based on the HDMI Control function. If a TV without the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, video signals of the playback device connected to this unit are transmitted to the TV, but this unit can not play back the audio from the TV. If you want to enjoy surround audio for TV program, a separate audio cable connection is required. In contrast, if a TV with the ARC function is connected via HDMI connections, no audio cable connection is required. Audio signals from the TV can be input to this unit through the HDMI cable between this unit and the TV. This function allows you to enjoy surround playback on this unit for the TV.

0 eARC (Enhanced Audio Return Channel) The eARC function is an extension of the conventional ARC function. It utilizes dedicated eARC function control to play back television audio from this unit without passing through HDMI control. Furthermore, the eARC function can transmit multichannel linear PCM, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS:X and other audio formats not compatible with conventional ARC. Connecting to an eARC function-compatible television also enables enjoyment of higher- quality surround playback of the audio content played from your television.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

318Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 ALLM (Auto Low Latency Mode) This unit automatically switches to low latency mode depending on playback contents when using a combination of television and game console compatible with the ALLM function.

0 VRR (Variable Refresh Rate): VRR reduces or eliminates lag, stutter and frame tearing for more fluid and better detailed gameplay.

0 QMS (Quick Media Switching): QMS for movies and video eliminates the delay that can result in blank screens before content is displayed.

0 QFT (Quick Frame Transport): QFT reduces latency for smoother no-lag gaming, and real-time interactive virtual reality.

0 FRL (Fixed Rate Link): FRL (Fixed Rate Link) is transmission technology that is required to provide higher resolutions such as ultra high speed bandwidths of 4K/ 60Hz or higher.

o Supported audio formats 2-channel Linear PCM

2-channel, 32 kHz 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

Multi-channel Linear PCM

7.1-channel, 32 kHz 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

Bitstream Dolby Digital / DTS / Dolby Atmos / Dolby TrueHD / Dolby Digital Plus / DTS:X / DTS-HD Master Audio / DTS-HD High Resolution Audio / DTS Express

DSD 2-channel 5.1-channel, 2.8 MHz

o Supported video signals 0 480i 0 480p 0 576i 0 576p 0 720p 60/50Hz 0 1080i 60/50Hz 0 1080p 60/50/24Hz 0 4K 120/100/60/50/30/25/24 Hz 0 8K 60/50/30/25/24 Hz

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

319Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Copyright protection system In order to play back digital video and audio such as BD video or DVD video via HDMI connection, both this unit and the TV or player must to support the copyright protection system known as HDCP (High- bandwidth Digital Content Protection System). HDCP is copyright protection technology comprised of data encryption and authentication of the connected AV devices. This unit supports HDCP. 0 If a device that does not support HDCP is connected, video and audio

are not output correctly. Read the owners manual of your television or player for more information.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

320Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Video conversion function This unit automatically converts the input video signals as shown in the diagram before outputting them to the TV.

0 The MAIN ZONE Video Conversion function is compatible with the following formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.

HDMI-compatible TV

Output (MONITOR OUT)Input (IN)

Video signal Video signal

Component video signal

HDMI signal Output

Video device This unit

HDMI-incompatible TV

HDMI signal

HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector HDMI connector

Component video signal

Component video connectors

Component video connectors

Component video connectors

Component video connectors

Video connector Video connector Video connector Video connector

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

321Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

This unit can convert the input video signals to the resolution that is set for Resolution in the menu before outputting them to the TV. (v p. 206) .

Output signal

Input signal

HDMI

480i/576i 480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p 30/25/24Hz

1080p 60/50Hz

4K 30/25/24Hz

4K 60/50Hz

4K 120/100Hz

8K 30/25/24Hz

8K 60/50Hz

HDMI

480i/576i

480p/576p

720p

1080i

1080p 30/25/24Hz

1080p 60/50Hz

4K 30/25/24Hz

4K 60/50Hz z1

4K 120/100Hz z2

8K 30/25/24Hz z2

8K 60/50Hz z2

Component video

480i/576i

480p/576p 720p 1080i 1080p

Video 480i/576i

z1 The HDMI connector on the front panel supports YCbCr 4:2:0 format only. z2 Only supported by the HDMI 7 connector.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

322Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back a USB memory devices 0 This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard. 0 This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4. 0 This unit is compatible with WMA META tags. 0 If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 500 (WMA/MP3/Apple Lossless/DSD) or 349 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then music may not

be played back properly.

o Compatible formats Sampling frequency Channel Bit rate Extension

WMAz1 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 192 kbps .wma MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 32 320 kbps .mp3 WAV 32/44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192 kHz 2-channel .wav MPEG-4 AACz1 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 - 320 kbps .aac/.m4a FLAC 44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192 kHz 2-channel .flac

Apple Losslessz2 44.1/48/88.2/ 96/176.4/192 kHz 2-channel .m4a

DSD 2.8/5.6 MHz 2-channel .dsf/.dff z1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.

Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computers settings.

z2 The Apple Lossless Audio Codec (ALAC) decoder is distributed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0).

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

323Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Maximum number of playable files and folder The limits on the number of folders and files that can be displayed by this unit are as follows.

Media Item USB memory device

Number of folder directory levels z1 8 levels Number of folders 500 Number of filesz2 5000 z1 The limited number includes the root folder. z2 The allowable number of files may differ according to the USB memory device

capacity and the file size.

Playing back a Bluetooth device This unit supports the following Bluetooth profile. 0 A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile):

When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, monaural and stereo sound data can be streamed at a high quality.

0 AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile): When a Bluetooth device that supports this standard is connected, the Bluetooth device can be operated from this unit.

o About Bluetooth communications Radio waves broadcast from this unit may interfere with the operation of medical devices. Make sure you turn off the power of this unit and Bluetooth device in the following locations as radio wave interference may cause malfunctions. 0 Hospitals, trains, aircraft, petrol kiosks and places where flammable

gases are generated 0 Near automatic doors and fire alarms

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

324Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back a file saved on a PC or NAS 0 This unit is compatible with MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) standard. 0 This unit can show the artwork that was embedded by using MP3 ID3-Tag Ver. 2.3 or 2.4. 0 This unit is compatible with WMA META tags. 0 If the image size (pixels) of an album artwork exceeds 500 500 (WMA/MP3/WAV/FLAC/Apple Lossless/DSD) or 349 349 (MPEG-4 AAC), then

music may not be played back properly. 0 A server or server software compatible with distribution in the corresponding formats is required to play music files via a network.

For playing mentioned audio formats via a network a server software, for example Twonky Media Server or jRiver Media Server, needs to be installed on your computer or NAS for full support. There are other server software available too. Please check supported formats.

o Specifications of supported files Sampling frequency Channel Bit rate Extension

WMAz1 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 192 kbps .wma MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 32 320 kbps .mp3 WAV 32/44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192 kHz 2-channel .wav MPEG-4 AACz1 32/44.1/48 kHz 2-channel 48 - 320 kbps .aac/.m4a FLAC 44.1/48/88.2/

96/176.4/192 kHz 2-channel .flac

Apple Losslessz2 44.1/48/88.2/ 96/176.4/192 kHz 2-channel .m4a

DSD 2.8/5.6 MHz 2-channel .dsf/.dff z1 Only files that are not protected by copyright can be played on this unit.

Content downloaded from pay sites on the Internet are copyright protected. Also, files encoded in WMA format when ripped from a CD, etc. on a computer may be copyright protected, depending on the computers settings.

z2 The Apple Lossless Audio Codec (ALAC) decoder is distributed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0).

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

325Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Playing back Internet Radio o Playable broadcast station specifications

Sampling frequency Bit rate Extension WMA 32/44.1/48 kHz 48 192

kbps .wma

MP3 32/44.1/48 kHz 32 320 kbps .mp3

MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 kHz 48 - 320 kbps

.aac/

.m4a

Personal memory plus function The most recently used settings (input mode, HDMI output mode, sound mode, tone control, channel level, MultEQ XT32, Dynamic EQ, Dynamic Volume, Restorer and audio delay, etc.) are saved for each input source.

0 Surround Parameter settings are stored for each sound mode.

Last function memory This function stores the settings which were made before going into the standby mode.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

326Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Explanation of terms o Audyssey Audyssey Dynamic EQ

Audyssey Dynamic EQ solves the problem of deteriorating sound quality as volume is decreased by taking into account human perception and room acoustics. Audyssey Dynamic EQ works in tandem with Audyssey MultEQ XT32 to provide well-balanced sound for every listener at any volume level. Audyssey Dynamic Volume

Dynamic Volume solves the problem of large variations in volume level between television programs, commercials, and between the soft and loud passages of movies. Audyssey Dynamic EQ is integrated into Dynamic Volume so that as the playback volume is adjusted automatically, the perceived bass response, tonal balance, surround impression, and dialog clarity remain the same.

Audyssey LFC (Low Frequency Containment) Audyssey LFC solves the problem of low frequency sounds disturbing people in neighboring rooms or apartments. Audyssey LFC dynamically monitors the audio content and removes the low frequencies that pass through walls, floors and ceilings. It then applies psychoacoustic processing to restore the perception of low bass for listeners in the room. The result is great sound that no longer disturbs the neighbors. Audyssey MultEQ XT32 Audyssey MultEQ XT32 is a room equalization solution that calibrates any audio system so that it can achieve optimum performance for every listener in a large listening area. Based on several room measurements, MultEQ XT32 calculates an equalization solution that corrects for both time and frequency response problems in the listening area and also performs a fully automated surround system setup.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

327Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Auro-3D Auro-3D

The Auro-3D technology suite is a groundbreaking new audio technology that combines height-based listening formats with powerful creative tools to deliver an unrivaled three-dimensional sound experience. Auro-3D is the general format name for Sound in 3D and its related speaker lay-outs. Auro-Matic

Auro-Matic up-mixing technology software is a unique creative tool that transforms legacy Mono, Stereo and Surround content into a natural 3D or 2D listening experience.

o Dolby Dolby Atmos Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener. Dolby Atmos Stream Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos Enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

328Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories. A total of 5.1-channels are played: 3 front channels (FL, FR and C), 2 surround channels (SL and SR) and the LFE channel for low frequency effects. Because of this, there is no crosstalk between channels and a realistic sound field with a three-dimensional feeling (sense of distance, movement and positioning) is achieved. This delivers a thrilling surround sound experience in the home. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an improved Dolby Digital signal format that is compatible with up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound and also improves sound quality thanks to extra data bit rate performance. It is upwardly compatible with conventional Dolby Digital, so it offers greater flexibility in response to the source signal and the conditions of the playback device. Dolby Surround Dolby Surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby Surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in- ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.

Dolby Speaker Technology (Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers) A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, Dolby Atmos Enabled speakers employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. These speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing. These features can be built into a conventional speaker or standalone speaker module. The features minimally impact the overall speaker footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby Surround playback. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is a high definition audio technology developed by Dolby Laboratories, using lossless coding technology to faithfully reproduce the sound of the studio master. This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

329Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Speaker Virtualizer Dolby Atmos height virtualization is a digital signal processing solution that leverages Dolbys deep understanding of human audio perception to create the sensation of overhead sound from the listener-level speakers. This signal processing applies height-cue filters to overhead audio components contained within the audio signal before they are mixed into the listener-level speakers. These filters simulate the natural spectral cues imparted by our ears to sounds that originate from overhead. For stereo and 3.1-channel speaker configuration, Dolby Atmos height virtualization is combined with surround virtualization to create an enveloping 360-degree audio minus the speakers that would ordinarily be employed behind or to the side of the listener.

o DTS Dialog Control Gives you control of the listening experience. You can lift the dialog out from the background sounds when clarity and intelligibility are desired. This requires that content has been authored to support Dialog Control. DTS This is an abbreviation of Digital Theater System, which is a digital audio system developed by DTS. DTS delivers a powerful and dynamic surround sound experience, and is found in the worlds finest movie theaters and screening rooms. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a digital audio format enabling high sound quality playback in 5.1-channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz and 24 bit quantization on DVD-Video. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is the standard digital surround format of DTS, Inc., compatible with a sampling frequency of 44.1 or 48 kHz and up to 5.1-channels of digital discrete surround sound.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

330Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 is a 6.1-channel discrete digital audio format adding a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 is a 6.1-channel audio format that inserts a surround back (SB) channel to the DTS digital surround sound through matrix encoding. Decoding of conventional 5.1-channel audio signals is also possible according to the decoder. DTS Express DTS Express is an audio format supporting low bit rates (max. 5.1- channels, 24 to 256 kbps). DTS-HD This audio technology provides higher sound quality and enhanced functionality than the conventional DTS and is adopted as an optional audio for Blu-ray Disc. This technology supports multi-channel, high data transfer speed, high sampling frequency, and lossless audio playback. Maximum 7.1-channels are supported in Blu-ray Disc.

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is an improved version of the conventional DTS, DTS-ES and DTS 96/24 signals formats, compatible with sampling frequencies of 96 or 48 kHz and up to 7.1-channels of discrete digital sound. High data bit rate performance provides high quality sound. This format is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data. DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is a lossless audio format created by Digital Theater System (DTS). This format provides the facility to support up to 8 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz/24 bit resolution and up to 6 audio channels with a sampling frequency of 192 kHz/24 bit resolution. It is fully compatible with conventional products, including conventional DTS digital surround 5.1-channel data. DTS:X DTS:X produces a hemisphere of audio, where flyovers as well as ambient backgrounds become truly enveloping. DTS:X objects enable audio to move smoothly from one speaker to any other creating life-like realism.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

331Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

DTS Neural:X Enables an immersive audio experience for older content. DTS Neural:X can upmix your stereo, 5.1 or 7.1 content to take full advantage of all speakers in your surround sound system. DTS Virtual:X DTS Virtual:X allows you to enjoy multi-dimensional sound regardless of room size, layout, or speaker configuration. IMAX

IMAX is well admired around the world for a premium large format movie experience. IMAX delivers the most advanced movie projection technology combined with rich, deep sound

o Audio AL32 Processing Multi Channel AL32 Processing for All Channels Denon has further developed its proprietary AL32 Processing, an analog waveform reproduction technology, to support the 192 kHz sampling frequency. AL32 Processing, thoroughly suppresses quantization noise associated with D/A conversion to reproduce the low-level signals with optimum clarity that will bring out all the delicate nuances of the music. Apple Lossless Audio Codec This is a codec for lossless audio compression method developed by Apple Inc. This codec can be played back on iTunes, iPod or iPhone. Data compressed to approximately 60 70 % can be decompressed to exactly the same original data. Bass Sync Audio sources such as BD and DVD inherently have time delay between the bass components of the satellite channel and the LFE channel. This function adjusts such a delay for reproducing (replaying) richer bass sound during playback. This function is by default set to 0 msec. Since the delay varies according to the title, play back the audio source and adjust to the most effective value for playback. For some audio sources that are played back, this function may have little effect.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

332Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

FLAC (Free Lossless Audio Codec) FLAC stands for Free lossless Audio Codec, and is a lossless free audio file format. Lossless means that the audio is compressed without any loss in quality. The FLAC license is as shown below. Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Josh Coalson Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 0 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 0 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

0 Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. LFE This is an abbreviation of Low Frequency Effect, which is an output channel that emphasizes low frequency effect sound. Surround audio is intensified by outputting 20 Hz to 120 Hz deep bass to the system subwoofer(s). MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) This is an internationally standardized audio data compression scheme, using the MPEG-1 video compression standard. It compresses the data volume to about one eleventh its original size while maintaining sound quality equivalent to a music CD.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

333Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group), MPEG-2, MPEG-4 These are the names for digital compression format standards used for the encoding of video and audio. Video standards include MPEG-1 Video, MPEG-2 Video, MPEG-4 Visual, MPEG-4 AVC. Audio standards include MPEG-1 Audio, MPEG-2 Audio, MPEG-4 AAC. WMA (Windows Media Audio) This is audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data can be encoded using Windows Media Player. To encode WMA files, only use applications authorized by Microsoft Corporation. If you use an unauthorized application, the file may not work properly. Sampling frequency Sampling involves taking a reading of a sound wave (analog signal) at regular intervals and expressing the height of the wave at each reading in digitized format (producing a digital signal). The number of readings taken in one second is called the sampling frequency. The larger the value, the closer the reproduced sound is to the original.

Speaker impedance This is an AC resistance value, indicated in (ohms). Greater power can be obtained when this value is smaller. Dialogue normalization function This function operates automatically during playback of Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Atmos, DTS or DTS-HD sources. It automatically corrects the standard signal level for individual program sources. Dynamic range The difference between the maximum undistorted sound level and the minimum discernible level above the noise emitted by the device. Downmix This function converts the number of channels of surround audio to a lower number of channels and plays back according to the systems configuration.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

334Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Video ISF ISF (Imaging Science Foundation) is an organization that certifies video technicians who are then qualified to carry out calibration and adjustment to match the installation conditions. It also sets quality standards for the optimization of device video performance. Progressive (sequential scanning) This is a scanning system of the video signal that displays 1 frame of video as one image. Compared to the interlace system, this system provides images with less flickering and jagged edges.

o Network AirPlay AirPlay sends (plays) contents recorded in iTunes or on an iPhone/iPod touch/iPad to a compatible device via the network. WEP Key (network key) This is key information used for encrypting data when conducting data transfer. On this unit, the same WEP key is used for data encryption and decryption, so the same WEP key must be set on both devices in order for communications to be established between them. Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Certification assures tested and proven interoperability by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group certifying interoperability among wireless LAN devices. WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) This is a security standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance. In addition to the conventional SSID (network name) and WEP key (network key), it also uses a user identification function and encrypting protocol for stronger security. WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) This is a new version of the WPA established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, compatible with more secure AES encryption.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

335Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared Key) This is a simple authentication system for mutual authentication when a preset character string matches on the wireless LAN access point and client. Network Names (SSID: Service Set Identifier) When forming wireless LAN networks, groups are formed to prevent interference, data theft, etc. These groups are based on SSID (network names). For enhanced security, a WEP key is set so that communication is unavailable unless both the SSID and the WEP key match. This is suitable for constructing a simplified network.

o Others Denon Link HD Denon Link HD uses the clock of the AV amplifier connected by Denon Link HD to achieve HDMI signal transfer with low jitter. HDCP When transmitting digital signals between devices, this copyright protection technology encrypts the signals to prevent content from being copied without authorization. MAIN ZONE The room where this unit is placed is called the MAIN ZONE. Pairing Pairing (registration) is an operation that is required in order to connect a Bluetooth device to this unit using Bluetooth. When paired, the devices authenticate each other and can connect without mistaken connections occurring. When using Bluetooth connection for the first time, you need to pair this unit and the Bluetooth device to be connected. Protection circuit This is a function to prevent damage to devices within the power supply when an abnormality such as an overload, excess voltage occurs or over temperature for any reason.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

336Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Trademark information

.

Apple, AirPlay, iPad, iPad Air, iPad Pro and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The trademark iPhone is used in Japan with a license from Aiphone K.K. Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.

.

Manufactured under license from Audyssey Laboratories. U.S. and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT32, Audyssey Dynamic EQ, Audyssey Dynamic Volume and Audyssey LFC are registered trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories.

.

Manufactured under license from Auro Technologies. Auro-3D and the related symbols are registered trademarks of Auro Technologies. All materials contained in this work are protected by copyright law and may not be reproduced, distributed, transmitted, displayed, published or broadcast without the prior written permission of Auro Technologies NV or in case of third party materials, the owner of that content. You may not alter or remove any trademark, copyright or other notice from copies of the content. Auro Technologies: mail info@auro-technologies.com, phone +32-(0)-14314343, fax +32-(0)-14321224, www.auro-technologies.com

.

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by D&M Holdings Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

337Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Audio, Dolby Surround, Dolby Vision, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together, DTS:X, the DTS:X logo, Virtual:X, and the DTS Virtual:X logo are registered trademarks and/or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

Manufactured under license from IMAX Corporation. IMAX is a registered trademark of IMAX Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All Rights Reserved. For DTS patents, see http:// patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

.

The MPEG-H TV Audio system logo is a trademark of Fraunhofer IIS and is registered in Germany and other countries.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

338Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

.

The terms HDMI, HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited. HDR10+ logo is a trademark of HDR10+ Technologies, LLC.

.

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Wi-Fi Certification provides assurance that the device has passed the interoperability test conducted by the Wi-Fi Alliance, a group that certifies interoperability among wireless LAN devices.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

339Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Specifications o Audio section 0 Power amplifier

Rated output: Front: 150 W + 150 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 190 W + 190 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Center: 150 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 190 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround: 150 W + 150 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 190 W + 190 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.) Surround back / Height1 / Height2 / Height3 / Height4/Front wide: 150 W + 150 W (8 /ohms, 20 Hz 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.) 190 W + 190 W (6 /ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Dynamic power: 170 W x 2-channel (8 /ohms) 280 W x 2-channel (4 /ohms)

Output connectors: 4 16 /ohms

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

340Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

0 Analog Input sensitivity: 200 mV Frequency response: 10 Hz 100 kHz +1, 3 dB (Direct mode) S/N: 102 dB (IHFA weighted, Direct mode) Distortion: 0.005 % (20 Hz 20 kHz) (Direct mode) Rated output: 1.2 V

0 Digital D/A output: Rated output 2 V (at 0 dB playback)

Total harmonic distortion 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB) S/N ratio 102 dB Dynamic range 100 dB

Digital input: Format Digital audio interface 0 Phono equalizer

Input sensitivity: 2.5 mV RIAA deviation: 1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz) S/N: 74 dB (IHF-A) Distortion factor: 0.03 % (1 kHz, 3 V)

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

341Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Video section 0 Standard video connectors

Input/output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75 /ohms Frequency response: 5 Hz 10 MHz 0, 3 dB

0 Color component video connector Input/output level and impedance: Y signal 1 Vp-p, 75 /ohms

PB / CB signal 0.7 Vp-p, 75 /ohms PR / CR signal 0.7 Vp-p, 75 /ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz 60 MHz 0, 3 dB

o Wireless LAN section Network type (wireless LAN standard): Conforming to IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n

(Wi-Fi compliant) z1 Security: WEP 64 bit, WEP 128 bit

WPA/WPA2-PSK (AES) WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP)

Used frequency range: 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz

z1 The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo and the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED On-Product Logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

342Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Bluetooth section Communications system: Bluetooth Specification Version 4.2 Transmission power: Bluetooth Specification Power Class 1 Maximum communication range: Approx. 30 m in line of sight z2 Used frequency range: 2.4 GHz Modulation scheme: FHSS (Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum) Supported profiles: A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) 1.2

AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control Profile) 1.5 Corresponding codec: SBC Transmission range (A2DP): 20 Hz 20,000 Hz

z2 The actual communication range varies depending on the influence of such factors as obstructions between devices, electromagnetic waves from microwave ovens, static electricity, cordless phones, reception sensitivity, antenna performance, operating system, application software etc.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

343Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o General Operating temperature: 5 C - 35 C Power supply: AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz Power consumption: 900 W Power consumption in standby modes:

Standby modes

Setting items in the menu

Power consumptionNetwork Control (v p. 256)

Allow Update (v p. 268)

HDMI Pass Through (v p. 199) / HDMI Control (v p. 201)

Normal standby Off In Standby Off Off 0.1 W Network control (Bluetooth) Always On Off 2.9 W Network control (Ethernet) Always On Off 2.9 W

Network control (Wi-Fi) Always On Off 3.7 W CEC standby Off In Standby Off On 0.5 W

RS-232C standby z Off In Standby Off Off 0.5 W

zWhen this unit is in standby mode by sending a standby command from the external controller via the RS-232C connector of this unit.

For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

344Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

o Dimensions (Unit : mm)

.

434

28 5

51 3

73 73

23

18 17

7

19 5 25

9

43 1

48 2

18

59

33

34445 45

60

o Weight: 23.6 kg

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

345Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Index v Numerics

11.1-channel ...................................... 74, 76, 77 13.1-channel .................................................. 63 15.1-channel .................................................. 68 3D ................................................................ 317 4K/8K ........................................................... 317 5.1-channel .............................................. 39, 48 7.1-channel .............................................. 38, 49 9.1-channel .................................................... 54

v A AirPlay .......................................................... 127 All Zone Stereo ............................................ 138 Audio formats ....................... 319, 323, 325, 326 Audio settings ....................................... 175, 180 Audyssey Dynamic EQ ............................. 327 Audyssey Dynamic Volume ...................... 327 Audyssey LFC .......................................... 327 Audyssey MultEQ XT32 ............................ 327 Audyssey settings ................................ 192, 219 Audyssey Sub EQ HT ............................... 218 Audyssey Setup ........................................ 217 Auto sound mode ......................................... 142 Auto Standby ............................................... 262

v B Bi-amp ............................................................ 74 Bluetooth device .......................................... 108 Blu-ray Disc player ................................. 88, 102

v C Cable TV ........................................................ 87

v D Denon Link HD ............................................. 336 Direct sound mode ....................................... 148 Display ........................................................... 22 Dolby Atmos ................................................. 328 Dolby sound mode ............................... 143, 329 DTS sound mode ................................. 144, 330 DVD player ............................................. 88, 102

v E ECO Mode ................................................... 259 External control device ................................... 97

v F Firmware Update .......................................... 267 Front panel ..................................................... 18

v G Game console ................................................ 91 General settings ................................... 178, 259

v H HDCP ........................................................... 320 HDMI Control ....................................... 155, 201 HEOS Account ..................................... 119, 258 HEOS Favorites ........................................... 132

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

346Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

v I Input Assign ................................................. 212 Input settings ........................................ 176, 212 Input source ................................................. 101 Internet Radio ............................................... 112

v L Listening position ......................................... 217

v M Menu map .................................................... 175 Muting .......................................................... 102

v N NAS ............................................................. 114 Network settings .......................................... 251

v O Original sound mode .................................... 147

v P Pairing .................................................. 108, 110 PC ................................................................ 114 PCM multi-channel sound mode .................. 146 Picture Mode ................................................ 197 Protection circuit .......................................... 336 Pure direct .................................................... 142

v Q Queue .......................................... 104, 115, 122 Quick select plus .......................................... 160

v R Rear panel ...................................................... 24 Remote control unit ........................................ 28 Resetting factory settings ............................. 314 Resetting network settings ........................... 315 Restorer ....................................................... 189

v S Satellite tuner ................................................. 87 Set-top box ..................................................... 87 Setup Assistant ............................................ 178 Sleep timer ................................................... 158 Sound mode ................................................. 140 Speaker connection ....................................... 42 Speaker settings .................................. 176, 217 Spotify .......................................................... 130 Stereo sound mode ...................................... 148

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

347Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

v T Tips .............................................................. 292 Troubleshooting ........................................... 294 TV ....................................................... 83, 84, 85

v U USB memory device .............................. 94, 103

v V Video camcorder ............................................ 91 Video Conversion ................................. 205, 321 Video Select ................................................. 136 Video settings ....................................... 175, 197 Volume ................................................. 102, 134

v W Web control .................................................. 166 Wi-Fi settings ............................................... 252 Wired LAN .............................................. 95, 251 Wireless LAN ......................................... 96, 252

v Z ZONE2/ZONE3 ...................................... 77, 168

Contents Connections Playback Settings Tips Appendix

348Front panel Display Rear panel Remote Index

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the AVC-X8500HA Denon works, you can view and download the Denon AVC-X8500HA Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Denon AVC-X8500HA as well as other Denon manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Denon AVC-X8500HA. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Denon AVC-X8500HA Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Denon AVC-X8500HA Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Denon AVC-X8500HA Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Denon AVC-X8500HA Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Denon AVC-X8500HA Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.